Home

Panasonic TD816 Ver 2 Instruction Manual

1. Location of Optional Cards and Units KX TD1232 A maximum of two 8 Station Line Units KX TD170 and or one of 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 can be installed to any of the three expansion areas Expansion 5 Pam oo area 3 m e e 8 Station Line oe T a5 o Unit ia TE a KX TD170 Expansion EE See erate area 2 if o E Ae dle a Ea MD le 15i Sol e x We IG EI 1 BENT moina Expansion a a area HT AGA ates E 4 ine Unit m KX TD180 ae ii e KX TD180D 4 DID Line ye Unit Expansion Card JI e KX TD185 Connectors 2 ISDN SO m Line Unit Remove the cover i KX TD280 plate s on the front SDN coven l s a a Note System Programming is required for expansion unit location Refer to Section 4 3 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 3 8 Station Line Unit 2 30 Installation 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Doorphone Card for KX TD816
2. Notice After pressing the Reset button slide the system clear switch to NORMAL at step 6 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system does not start up with the default values Installation 2 57 2 7 System Restart Notice If after checking the system features you determine that the system is not operating properly restart the system Keep in mind that the following features are cleared when you restart the system e Camp on e Call Park The following features are cancelled when you restart the system e Calls on Hold e Calls on Exclusive Hold e Calls in progress 1 Make sure that the system clear switch is set to NORMAL 2 Press the Reset button with a pointed tool If the system clear switch is set to CLEAR do not slide the system clear switch to NORMAL within 20 seconds of pressing the Reset button If you do the system programming data is reset to the default values Refer to Section 2 8 System Data Clear Wait over 30 seconds after pressing the Reset button and then slide the system clear switch to NORMAL If the system still does not operate properly please see Section 6 1 4 Using Reset Button 2 58 Installation 2 8 System Data Clear After storing or changing the system programming data you can clear the programm
3. Button Code Parameter 0 Single CO KX TD816 01 through 08 CO line number KX TD1232 01 through 24 CO line number 1 DSS 2 through 4 digits Extension number 2 One Touch 16 digits max Telephone number 3 Message Waiting None 4 FWD DND None 5 Save None 6 Account None 7 Conference None 8 Voice Mail Transfer 2 through 4 digits Extension number Loop CO None Group CO 1 through 8 CO line group number CO ringer frequency 1 through 8 ring tone type number Default e KX TD816 All jacks CO buttons through 8 Single CO 01 through 08 Ring tone type 2 e KX TD1232 All jacks CO buttons through 24 Single CO 01 through 24 Ring tone type 2 Programming 1 Enter 005 Display Flexible Key Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display PI PGM Mode 4 Press a CO button to be changed The display shows the contents pre assigned to the button Display example CO O1 4 24 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment contd Cancelling Conditions Feature References 5 Enter a button code plus parameter if required To change the parameter press CLEAR and the new parameter 6 Press STORE 7 To program another CO button of the same jack repeat steps 4 through 6 e To program another jack press SELECT and repeat steps 3 thr
4. Amplifier Two car batteries connected in series e Consisting of two 12 VDC Doorphone 2 KX T30865 Optional Line Isolation External Music Source 2 Unit Amplifier Speaker 2 Note It is an Austel requirement that an optional Line Isolation Unit obtainable from your installer be fitted between the External Music Jack and the External Music Source and between the Paging Jack and the Paging Equipment Installation 2 11 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD816 KX TD1232 m m giii KX TD816 CO Lightning Protectors KX TD816 8 CO Lines CO s I through 8 additional i KX TD1232 12 CO Lines CO s 1 through 12 additional 16 Extensions 8 extensions initial E 1 i i 8 extensions additional 1 1 1 1 a KX TD1232 32 Extensions 16 extensions initial 16 extensions additional S one pair RNL l Single Line Telephone one pair one pair one pair IOo a SS Se Telephone Answering Machine with Facsimile Notes It is recommended that 1 1 nS extension of jack 1 is a two display proprietary pair telephone two pair KX T7250 one pair amp val Voice Processing System oe SN j needs optional cards or adaptor e Parallel telephone connections are possible e The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit two pair
5. Extension gt C FWD VPS VME postissa gt VM2 A VM Hunting i Chain VMX j amp VM3 1 2 Intercept Routing to VM If a CO line is set as Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA whose destination is the VPS an outside call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number Outside Call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N System IRNA Extension gt VM Hunting Chain lt 42 N lt lt Features 3 127 V 3 Features 1 3 Transferring to VM The extension user can transfer an outside call to the VPS so that calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the VPS Pressing this button and entering the extension number allows the extension user to transfer the call to the mailbox of the corresponding extension Outside Call System 1 Transfer VPS 2 Transfer Extension Extension gt VM1 _ gt VM 2 ead Operator by VM Transfer A i usy no an
6. 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set 1 Jan 94 12 00 am 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Not Stored 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set Not Stored 003 Extension Number Set e KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 e KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 004 Extension Name Set Not Stored 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment e KX TD816 CO Buttons 1 through 8 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 08 ringing tone type 2 e KX TD1232 CO Buttons through 24 of All Jacks Single CO 01 through 24 ringing tone type 2 006 Operator Manager Extension Operator 1 Jack 01 Assignment Operator 2 and Manager Unassigned 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Not Stored Telephone Assignment 008 Absent Messages 1 Will Return Soon 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext 4 Back at 5 Out Until 6 In a Meeting 7 through 9 Not Stored 009 Budget Management 0 Pulse 010 Charge Margin Rate 0 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering See page 4 35 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode Manual 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Every Day of the Week Day 9 00 am Night 5 00 pm 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group 12345678 Assignment 106 Station Hunting Type All Extension Groups Disable 107 System Password 1234 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Enable 109 Expa
7. ccccccccccsssrsccsssssccsscsssccssssssscscessssseees 4 126 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 4 126 801 SMDR Formats sina ccs dscterdiceeet dec ecbeeciceciss aA A a ARNG 4 127 802 System Data Printout s sci sccccisisdzercassaccesagieaensdvcescegudesccenseconat s 4 128 803 Music Source Usnama i A S 4 129 804 External Pager BGM ssssssesssesssesessseessressesssesesseessseessresseessee 4 130 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone sssssesseesesesessseesssessessee 4 131 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 4 132 813 Floating Number Assignment 0 cceeecceceeeeeeeseeeeeteeeenaees 4 134 814 Modem Standard ccc cccccccccsccecececececececececesececeeeeeeeeeeass 4 135 815 System Working Report Printout 00 eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeseeees 4 136 816 System Working Report Clear ceceeessecesreeesseeeeeteeeenaees 4 137 4 10 Option Programming esssssessocsssccssccesooesooesooessscessocesocesoosssoesssesssose 4 138 990 System Additional Information ssesssesseeeeeeeesseessessessseeseee 4 138 991 COS Additional Information 00eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesesssssess 4 143 Section 5 List 5 1 Tone Ring POM 5 ciscecesielesccscisiavceaiccecseanenctensdcsvcccincaccesancsvezoastoancsete 5 2 SZ Default Vales wosissiicsssseressiesstrossoserstsssseroes isro seitsuocho ostsee vi tisis sbs isis oeni 5 4 Section 6 Troubleshoot
8. System Programming 4 143 991 4 11 Option Programming COS Additional Information conta 5 Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection 6 To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press STORE 8 To program another COS press SELECT and the desired COS number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END Conditions None Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Follow Me Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Class of Service COS 4 144 System Programming Section 5 List This section lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Tone Ring Tone 5 1 Do Not Disturb DND Confirmation Tone 4 Tone lt TONE gt Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 CO CO Call Limit Warning Tone List 5 2 Tone Ring Tone 5 1 Ww 4 f 4 Q oO N N Q9 oO n el lt TONE gt Call Waiting Tone 2 lt RING TONE gt Intercom Hold Recall Doorphone Calls Timed Reminder Callback Ringing Camp on Recall Call Waiting Tone 2 CO Call Waiting Tone 1 intercom CO intercom CO Hold Recall Hold Alarm Intercom Calls CO Calls 5 3 List
9. Digital Super Hybrid System Panasonic NSTALLATION ANUAL MODEL KX TD816AL KX TD1232AL NNI CoU ea oo NNN lt a ANN Please read this manual before connecting the Digital Super Hybrid System r D1232 f KX TD1232AL We meas Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX TD816AL KX TD1232AL Digital Super Hybrid System System Components Model No Description Ren Unit ee a Pig uber end yen KX TD1232AL Digital Super Hybrid System Main Unit including the KX TD196 Remote Card Telephone KX T7220AL Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7230AL Digital Proprietary Telephone with Display KX T7235AL Digital Proprietary Telephone with Large Display KX T7250AL Digital Proprietary Telephone Optional KX T 240AL_ Digital DSS Console Equipment KX TD160 Doorphone Card KX TD170AL 8 Station Line Unit KX TD180AL 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180DAL 4 CO Line Unit KX TD181AL 8 CO Line Card KX TD181DAL 8 CO Line Card KX TDI85AL 4 DID Line Unit KX TD192 System Inter Connection Card two cards with Connection Cable KX TD280AL 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD281AL 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX T30865 Doorphone s i sSS KX A216 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A46 Battery Adaptor System Components Table Note The models marked can be installed only i
10. Features 3 15 B Operation References User Manual Button Flexible Description Conditions Basic Operation Making Calls DSS Console Features Location of Controls 3 Features The use of Flexible Buttons is determined by either system or station programming The following three types of Flexible Buttons are provided on digital proprietary telephones DPT and DSS Console e Flexible CO buttons provided on DPT only e Flexible DSS buttons provided on DSS Console only e Programmable Feature PF buttons The table below shows all of the features which can be assigned to Flexible Buttons Button Features to be assigned Voice Mail Transfer S S S In the table indicates that the feature can be assigned to the button e ACO line can only appear on one Single CO button of any given telephone A station can only appear on one DSS button of any given telephone or DSS Console e It is possible to have multiple appearances of the same Group CO or Loop CO buttons on the same telephone Incoming and outgoing calls on the line are shown on the button in the following priority Single CO gt Group CO gt Loop CO 3 16 Features 3 Features B Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cceccceecceseeeteeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Butto
11. 3 19 Special Display Features for KX T7235 ooo eeececeeeeeeeteeeenteeeeneeees 3 103 CO Out som s Call Log osn 50 a o neea S E E A E vances evssey sonatas 3 103 Extension Dialing en i r E es dewds cededeen ened dhe a e iaraa 3 103 Station Speed Dra lin oe o oo cs sesence ease ceed e epo aa vite ou gdh conse a a EOE sess dates 3 104 System Feature Access Menu sisri eceseesecscecsecsseeseceseeseceseeseceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeens 3 104 system Speed Dialing seure ns ctvessiecsss Ria ied rancid Serna ite A 3 105 Station Feature Clear visscn cstessteassarvieustnaieanaddeaatnadnenteasn deans 3 106 Station HUNNE ieena a Beat en eee eae EE A SREE 3 106 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR seseecsrersrererererer 3 107 Station Programming e ssseesesssesessseessessresserssetessseessresseesseeesseeessees 3 109 11 Contents Station Programming Data Default Set ee eeeeeeneeeneeeteenees 3 110 Station Speed Dairy gt oe Giacs Jang a a a S e e E 3 111 System ONMNCCLLION aicci a a T E 3 111 system Data Default Seti renty een neee ieas 3 112 System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 3 113 System Programming with Digital Proprietary Telephone 3 114 System Pec Pra ine aa na acuaueapnde reverand eae 3 115 System Working Report cissscccsscisdescdacsnsesadevanssacdesnacases lacsaardsuseacevennccets 3 116 T Time Out Variable eiigs0s ccsdhcescss a a N AREAS URON 3 117 Timed Re minder assisas a
12. 1 1 1 1 Confirmation tone 2 a Indicates that the new setting is identical to the previous setting b In addition sent when various features are successfully performed or accessed e g Call Hold Automatic Callback Busy c Sent when accessing external paging equipment e g Paging All Paging External Confirmation tone from external pagers can be enabled or disabled ls 1 l lt lt _ _ Confirmation tone 3 Sent when a conversation is established just after dialing For example when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve Features 3 45 C 3 Features e Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer This tone can be eliminated by system programming so that the user can start talking instantly ls prj jj Confirmation tone 4 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call and vice versa These are caused by Conference It is possible to eliminate this tone by system programming ls 1 ie Conditions Confirmation Tone 1 and 2 are provided to reconfirm the assigned feature Programming References Section 4 System Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Fields 13 16 Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Consultation Hold Description Allows the extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to transfer it or m
13. 5 No 2 D2 No 10 D2 No 18 D2 No 26 D2 31 P1 P1 P1 P1 6 P2 P2 P2 P2 32 T T T T 7 R R R R 33 Jack p Jack p Jack bi Jack pi 8 No 3 D2 No 11 D2 No 19 D2 No 27 D2 34 P1 P1 P1 P1 9 P2 P2 P2 P2 35 T T T T 10 R R R R 36 Jack p Jack D1 Jack D1 Jack Di 11 No 4 D2 No 12 D2 No 20 D2 No 28 D2 37 P1 P1 P1 P1 12 P2 P2 P2 P2 38 T T T T 13 R R R R 39 Jack p Jack D1 Jack D1 Jack Di 14 No 5 D2 No 13 D2 No 21 D2 No 29 D2 40 P1 P1 P1 P1 15 P2 P2 P2 P2 41 T T T T 16 R R R R 42 Jack p Jack pi Jack pi Jack pi 17 No 6 D2 No 14 D2 No 22 D2 No 30 D2 43 P1 P1 P1 P1 18 P2 P2 P2 P2 44 T T T T 19 R R R R 45 Jack p Jack pi Jack pi Jack pi 20 No 7 D2 No 15 D2 No 23 D2 No 3 1 D2 46 Pl Pl P1 P1 21 P2 P2 P2 P2 47 T T T T 22 R R R R 48 Jack p Jack pi Jack Di Jack pi 23 No 8 D2 No 16 D2 No 24 D2 No 32 D2 49 Pl Pl P1 P1 24 P2 P2 P2 P2 50 25 2 16 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Notes F SEXTN in the table indicates an extension expansion area for KX TD1232 There are three expansion areas on the main unit of KX TD1232 Up to two 8 Station Line Units and a 4 CO Line Unit can be installed to any area It is required to designate which is 8 Stati
14. All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Enable Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Jack 01 1 All Doorphones Other Jacks No Port 1 Port 2 Day Night Doorphone Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes Not Stored 610 ISDN DDI Number Extension Not Stored Number Transformation Resource Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Outgoing Calls All Incoming Calls On Log Printout 801 SMDR Format Page Length 66 Skip Perforation 0 802 System Data Printout Not Applicable 803 Music Source Use Hold and BGM Music 1 804 External Pager BGM All External Pagers Disable 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone On 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters New Line Code CR LF Baud Rate 9600 Word Length 8 Parity Bit Mark Stop Bit 1 Port1 Port2 813 Floating Number Assignment e KX TD816 Pager 1 296 DTA 299 e KX TD1232 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 Pager 3 396 Pager 4 397 MODEM 399 DTA 299 814 Modem Standard CCITT 815 System Working Report Printout Not Applicable 816 System Working Report Clear Not Applicable Option Programming 990 System Additional Information See pages 4 139 through 4 142 991 COS Additional Information See page 4 143 Available for KX TD1232 only List 5 7 Section 6 Troubleshooting This section provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting 6 1 1 Installa
15. An example of a printed call record 24 06 93 9 00AM 24 06 93 9 10AM 24 06 93 9 20AM a 2 3 CO Dial Number ANS Duration Cost Acc CD 01 0344853233 00 05 12 00000 01 12345 01 lt I gt 0344853233 00 12 00000 01 12345 TR 01 lt I gt 0344853233 00 10 00 20 12 00000 01 12345 FW 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Features 3 107 3 Features Example of SMDR printout format Explanation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Date shows the date of the call as Day Month Year Time shows the end time of a call as Hours Minutes AM or PM Ext shows the extension number floating number etc that engaged in a call CO shows the CO line number used for the call Dial Number Outgoing call shows the other party s telephone number maximum 20 digits Valid digits are 0 through 9 P Gf PAUSE button is pressed or the mark if a host PBX access code is entered Received call Shows lt I gt that indicates Incoming ANS shows the time between the start of ringing and answer Duration shows the duration of the call as Hours Minutes Seconds Cost shows the cost of the call Acc Account Code shows the account code appended to the call 10 CD Condition Code shows call handling type with the following codes TR Transfer FW Call Forwarding to CO Line RM Remote access to a modem To print out the record of system programming items that have been assigned
16. Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 2 Manager Programming Charge Margin Rate Assigns the margin rate of a telephone charge Margin 0 through 999 0 1 Enter 010 Display Charge Margin 2 Press NEXT Display Margin 0 3 Enter a charge margin rate To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Telephone charge Real charge x ae The telephone charge will be printed out when checking out Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Check In Check Out 4 32 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the leading digits of extension numbers and feature numbers for system features e Selection number 01 through 56 See Feature Number List on page 4 35 for the corresponding features e Feature number 1 or 2 digits for selection numbers 01 through 16 1 through 3 digits for selection numbers 17 through 56 See Feature Number List on page 4 35 1 Da 8 Enter 100 Display FLX Numbering Press NEXT Display Select NO gt Enter a selection number To enter selection number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 EXT BL 2 Enter the feature number To delete the feature number press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number Press STORE
17. Programming Example The following is an example to show how to program ARS so that the user can call the XYZ Company via the least expensive line Step 1 Program ARS to work when the feature number for ARS is dialed by the user Use the program 312 ARS Mode to enable it Step 2 Store the telephone number of an outside party that will use the ARS feature For example if the XYZ Company s telephone number is 1 234 567 8910 not including the line access code store the leading seven digits of the number 1234567 To store the numbers use one of the programs 314 through 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 Leading Digit Tables 1 through 8 Here it is supposed that we have selected Leading Digit Table 1 to store the number Remember that Table number 1 matches Route Plan Table 1 Example Program Address 314 Leading Digit Table 1 Location Entry 01 1234567 02 50 Table 1 Step 3 Check all carriers available to call the stored telephone number and their CO line groups Suppose there are three carriers available to call the XYZ Company and each carrier s line is assigned to a CO line group as follows Carrier E CO Line Group 1 Carrier F CO Line Group 2 Carrier G CO Line Group 3 Then check the fee charged by each carrier Features 3 7 3 Features Carrier G aa high aa or War ee ee l T Carrier F i i low Carrier E 1 TTT tt 12 3
18. ccccccceseceseeesseeeesteeees output This lead is held ON whenever CR DSR is ON Clear To Send CS CTS cccccccccccecseseescesceeesesesseees input An ON condition of the CS CTS circuit indicates that the printer is ready to receive data from the unit The unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive data when the CS CTS circuit is OFF Data Set Ready CR DSR ceccccccececeseceesteeeensees input An ON condition of the CR DSR circuit indicates that the printer is ready An ON condition does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer Signal Ground SG Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all interface signals Data Terminal Ready ER DTR 0 ee eeeeees output This signal line is turned on by the unit to indicate that it is online The ON condition does not indicate that communication has been established with the printer The signal line is switched OFF when the unit is offline Data Carrier Detect CD DCD cece input The ON condition is an indication to data terminal DTE that the catrier signal is being received Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recor
19. 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 5 Secure the inside screw include to fix the cabinet to the main unit A 5 Inside screw Note Be sure to fix the inside screw to the main unit or the unit may not work properly 6 Prepare the required plugs Two 4 pin plugs are included in KX TD180 D or KX TD280 to connect four CO lines Eight 6 pin plugs are included in KX TD170 to connect eight extensions e To prepare a 4 pin plug for KX TD180 D perform step 1 on page 2 32 To prepare a 4 pin plug for KX TD280 perform step 1 on page 2 33 e To prepare a 6 pin plug for KX TD170 perform step 1 on page 2 15 7 Insert the plug into a jack on the unit Connect an earth wire to the earth terminal on the extension expansion unit KX TD170 25 Earth Terminal 4 To extensions jack numbers 9 16 17 24 25 32 KX TD180 D Jack for Power Failure Transfer COS or CO9 CO6 or CO10 C07 or CO11 F CO8 or CO12 u To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Dr D gt For details refer to Section 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection 2 40
20. Assigns if an extension s mailbox number is 0 extension 0 Voice Mail substituted by the extension number or it is number Integration programmable free If a call is forwarded 1 free or rerouted to the VPS this system automatically transmits the mailbox number to the VPS to specify the user s mailbox To make it programmable select 1 free then assign the number in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 19 Assigns the first display of a digital large 0 names 0 Special Display display digital proprietary telephone KX 1 numbers Features for KX T7235 in Station Speed Dialing T7235 Station Speed Dialing 20 Assigns the source of Music Source 1 for 0 internal music 1 e Background Music on Hold and BGM source Music BGM 1 external music e Background source Music BGM External e Music on Hold 21 Selects inter digit pause for pulse dialing 00 630 ms 01 None 01 830 ms 10 1030 ms 22 Selects intercom dial tone frequency 0 normal 0 None 1 distinctive 23 This field is provided to assign PAD Switch 0 0dB 0 None Control volume control of received calls ona 1 3 dB CO line This can be assigned per CO line The CO numbers 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines 1 through 8 for KX TD816 and CO numbers 1 through 24 correspond to CO lines 1 through 24 for KX TD1232 respectively 24 Prevents or allows a call originated by an AA 0 prevent 1 Voice Mail port of V
21. Doorphone Card Connector Backup Battery Connector Front Cover is Open HAOnAAGoAAL Install Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 Operates all the features in the event of a power failure Install Doorphone Card KX TD160 This card connects two doorphones and two door openers System Inter Connection Card 8 CO Line Card 4 ISDN S0 Line Card for KX TD1232 System Inter Connection Card Connector CO Line Expansion Card Connector Front Cover is open Install System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 This card connects two DSHSs together Install 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 KX TD181D Adds eight CO lines or Install 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 Adds four ISDN SO lines Installation 2 31 Card Installation Wire Specifications Note 2 4 2 CO Line Connection kx 101232 CO1 through CO8 To connect CO 1 through CO 8 to KX TD1232 install the
22. H is stored for GETMSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the port succeeding the Feature References Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 48 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to set the time for checking the normality of the system Every day at the programmed time system data is checked If an error is checked it is recorded onto error log Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM 1 00 AM 1 Enter 115 Display Adjust Time 2 Press NEXT to program hour Display example 1 00 AM 3 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 4 Press m to program minute 5 Enter the Minute To change the current entry enter the new minute 6 Press m to program AM PM 7 Press SELECT for AM or PM 8 Press STORE 9 Press END You cannot leave the entry empty None System Programming 4 49 116 4 3 System Programming ROM Version Display Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Confirms the version of the ROM of Master and Slave Systems Display example PO11A30101A Version Date System Number KX TD816 0 KX TD1232 0 Master 1 Slave Not applicable 1
23. Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Features 3 77 L 3 Features Line Access CO Line Group Description Conditions Allows the extension user to dial access a CO line group An idle line is selected from the CO line group To specify a CO line group dial the feature number the default setting is 8 anda desired CO line group number 1 through 8 A digital proprietary telephone user can also specify a CO line group by pressing a Group CO button e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access e An idle line is selected in sequence from the lines in the specified CO line group e Group CO buttons must be programmed prior to use e If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the telephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering CO line group line access 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 cccccccccseececeteceteceeeeeeeeeaees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Gro
24. Used to program the absent messages An absent message if set by the station user is displayed on the calling extension s telephone to show the reason for the user s absence e Message number 1 through 9 e Message 16 characters max 1 Will Return Soon 5 Out Until 2 Gone Home 6 In a Meeting 3 At Ext 7 through 9 Blank not stored 4 Back at 1 Enter 008 Display Message Asn 2 Press NEXT Display MSG NO gt 3 Enter a message number To enter message number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example MSG1 Will Return 4 Enter the message For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new message 5 Press STORE 6 To program another message press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired message number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of nine messages Messages 1 through 6 are programmed at the factory but can be changed Each message has a maximum of 16 characters e You can enter a maximum of seven characters per message which can be programmed at each user s station The station user can enter 0 System Programming 4 29 008 Feature References 4 2 Manager Programming Absent Messages contd through 99 and for the characters If the user enters digits less than the number of characters
25. User Manual Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Retrieve CO Line Description Conditions Allows the extension user to retrieve a specified outside call that has been placed on hold by another extension Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold retrieve CO line 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Features 3 29 C 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Hold Retrieve Call Hold Retrieve Intercom Description Allows the extension user to retrieve a call that has been placed on hold by another extension Conditions Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the hold is retrieved by the feature number Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold retrieve intercom 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold Intercom Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Hold Retrieve Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Descripti
26. pulse break ratio and inter digit pause for the line if needed If a line is assigned DTMF select an appropriate DTMF duration for the line if needed After a held call is retrieved the dial mode goes back to the one originally programmed on the CO line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection 403 Pulse Speed Selection Features 3 49 D 3 Features 404 DTMF Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 17 21 Feature References Section 3 Features End to End DTMF Signaling Pulse to Tone Conversion Tone Through Operation References Not applicable Direct Dialing In DDI Description Provides an automatic direction of an incoming ISDN S0 line call to a specific extension This requires a DDI number informed from the ISDN network The DDI number is converted to a specific extension number by using a pre programmed conversion table Extension DSHS Network 200 3 External DDI 111 telephone 201 ISDN DDI 112 Iq SSS ES eee 202 555 4112 DDI 113 DDI number Explanation 1 An incoming call from the ISDN network reaches your DSHS Digital Super Hybrid System The ISDN network informs DSHS of the DDI number 2 DSHS converts the DDI number to an extension number and directs the call to the extension Conditions e The DDI service can be enabled or disabled on a CO line basis e After th
27. 331 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Modify Added Number Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Determines how the dialed number should be modified before sending to the central office Digits are added to the beginning of the dialed number e Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number to be added 20 digits max All modification tables Not stored 1 Enter 331 Display ARS Modify Add 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table gt 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 4 Enter the number to be added To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables each of which can be given a number to be added e Each number has a maximum of 20 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 80 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to identify the CO lines which are connected to the system s This prevents users from ori
28. AUtomatic cccccccccccccesseececccccccessssessccccescsssenseseceeees 3 94 PICKUp Dialing treshi ey boos a e a a Meedeameaeensdins 3 95 P wer Faill re R st ft osoni nn ia a a a 3 95 Power Failure Transfer sitssatuusianst en in wb satatics dls uses Tele Bau ca usa ase el Ge 3 96 Pulse to Tone Conversion shi mbnatesteese ceils ieee otras aes wate hseast 3 96 PCa serch cee Ra te ince Dae ced atlas Father E i hosts otis 3 97 Re dial Automatic nesmen nres ila tubecdbes eee N ads vere i U RNA 3 98 Redial East NUMBER esis sdissvecccdetived dassvgcccatest pecadeba otderaesl a at 3 98 Redial Saved Number 0 cccccccecccccccccsesessececccccssessssescsscessssseneneeeees 3 99 Remote Station Lock Control ccccccecsecccessseceeeeseeeceessseeeesssseeeees 3 100 Reverse Circuit enren ee atl se Ree ae cas tae i Selec 3 100 Rinsing Delayed anrr e A E e A R i 3 100 Ringing Discriminating coverccsiaseoredcaasseceseagsesdaqassuesatvessevacnesedssessenadenes 3 101 Ringing Tone Selection for CO ButtonSs essseeeeeeeereeerereererrsne 3 102 Saved Number Redial Redial Saved Numbet ccccccceccee eee 3 99 Screened Call Transfer to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line wo eee 3 35 Screened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Screened to Extension c cece cesses 3 36 DE CKCE DITES AAT E Gs el tae Ratatat ela hades 3 102 Single CO S CO Button Button Single CO S CO
29. After pressing END you can go to any program address you desire You can return to the Initial Message mode any time by pressing END T number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through l 9 and keys FLASH PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To go to the next lager program address do not press END but press Soft 1 SKP or i VOLUME i To go to the next smaller program address do not press END but press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or i VOLUME j I 19 Tells you what you should notice or consider when doing the programming Feature References Section 3 Features Special Display Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 20 Lists all of the features related to the programming These features are described in Section 3 Programming Structure Program Address Programming Group Description 000 010 Manager Programming These programs may meet frequent changes requested by the customer 100 121 System Programming Entire system programming 200 213 Timer Programming Flexible system timer setting 300 331 TRS ARS Programming Assignment of Toll Restriction and ARS 400 435 CO Line Programming Setting of CO line and CO line group values 500 508 COS Programming Setting of Class of Service COS 600 610 Extension Programming Setting of extension va
30. Before restarting the system records the error logs if necessary Conditions If System Connection is established the Slave system makes a copy of the restored data of the Master system e In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Camp On and Call Park Programming References No programming required Feature References None Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 95 P 3 Features Operation References Not applicable Power Failure Transfer Description If a power failure should happen or during a system off line state single line telephone SLT which is connected the Power Failure jack should be connected straight to specific CO lines Connections between the CO lines and the SLTs are as follows KX TD816 CO 1 is connected to extension jack 1 CO 2 is connected to extension jack 2 CO 5 is connected to the power failure transfer jack KX TD1232 CO 1 2 and 9 are connected to the power failure transfer jacks of Master System CO 13 14 and 21 are connected to the power failure transfer jacks of Slave System Conditions e Only SLT is available during a power failure Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 2 CO Line Connection KX TD816 CO 1 through CO 4 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 5 4 CO Line Unit Connection 2 4 6 4 DID Line Unit Connection 2 5 Power Failure T
31. Conditions This system can be programmed with a personal computer or a digital proprietary telephone DPT DPTs available for system programming are KX T7235 and KX T7230 Display DPTs Two extensions are allowed to perform system programming The extensions available are 1 An extension that is connected to jack 1 2 An extension that is assigned as a manager For more information and programming instructions refer to Section 4 System Programming e During system programming the system operates normally e During system programming the extension is considered to be busy e The display on the DPT permits interactive programming e Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time e To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed e A personal computer can be used to perform system programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 107 System Password 3 114 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features S Feature References Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Operation References Not applicable System Speed Dialing Description This feature supports 500 abbreviated dial numbers available to all users A system speed dial number is dialed out by pressing the AUTO button and a 3 digit code 000 through
32. Display example Override Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END Select Enable for toll restriction override Select Disable for toll restriction Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 4 70 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References These allow you to specify the numbers which are toll restricted for each toll restriction level as follows Program 301 restricts levels 2 through 6 Program 302 restricts levels 3 through 6 Program 303 restricts levels 4 through 6 Program 304 restricts levels 5 through 6 Program 305 restricts level 6 es ee ee ae e Location number 01 through 20 Toll call number 7 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 301 through 305 Display example TRS Deny LVL 2 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a toll call number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 thro
33. Enter 118 Display Charge Refer Ext 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the slave e To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference 4 52 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 119 Charge Verification ID Code Set Description Assigns an ID code required to refer the charge information Selection 4 digits 0000 through 9999 Default 1234 Programming 1 Enter 119 Display Charge ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display example Code 1234 3 Enter an ID code To delete the current entry press CLEAR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions None Feature Reference Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference System Programming 4 53 120 4 3 System Programming User Password Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the password required for entering User Programming mode In the User Programming Mode
34. Field 17 and Field 21 are used to select a pulse break ratio and inter digit pause if needed Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection 4 84 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 404 DTMF Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set to DTMF mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two settings This program sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent to a CO line set to DTMF mode CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Time milliseconds 80 160 All CO lines 80 ms 1 Enter 404 Display DTMF Time 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 80msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e The DTMF time required is determined by the CO line or PBX line Section 3 Features Dial Type Sele
35. Programming 1 Enter 805 Display Ext Pag Ack Tone 2 Press NEXT Display example Tone On 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed for KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available Feature References Section 3 Features Confirmation Tone Paging External Paging All System Programming 4 131 806 807 4 10 Resource Programming EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 Description Assigns the communication parameters for the EIA RS 232C interface for Port 1 for KX TD816 and Master System of KX TD1232 or Port 2 for Slave System of KX TD1232 New line code Select the code for your printer or personal computer If your printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LE Baud rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the system to the printer or personal computer Word length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character Parity A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of your printer or person
36. Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Intercept Routing provides an automatic re direction of calls which cannot or have not been answered These programs set the destination in both day and night modes for each line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no Intercept Routing All CO line groups Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 409 for day or 410 for night Display example TRG Intercpt Day 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter the CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable Intercept Routing press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set or floating numbers of pagers in program 813 Floating Number Assignment You cannot assign the floating number of the modem e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to
37. There is no need to press the TRANSFER button The extension starts ringing immediately e One Touch Transfer cannot be performed when there is another call on Consultation Hold If One Touch Transfer mode is disabled the user transfers an outside call by pressing the TRANSFER button followed by the DSS button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Operator Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Section 3 Features Button Direct Station Selection DSS DPT Features Call Transfer to Extension DSS Console Features Call Transfer The system supports up to two operators Any extension can be appointed as an operator The extension assigned as an operator has the ability to perform the following operations e Switching Day Night mode manually e Setting clearing station lockout remotely Turning Background Music External on and off e Controlling CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock mode e Handling Hotel Application e If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the operator s extension the proprietary telephone user is regarded as the operator e The operator can be assigned as a destination of the Transfer Recall by system programming Features 3 89 O 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Opera
38. To change the current entry enter the new music source number 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program BGM Display example BGM Musicl 6 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new music source number Press STORE Press END Conditions e The music source is a user supplied item For KX TD816 one music source can be installed For KX TD1232 two music sources can be installed per system Music sources 1 and 2 are connected to the Master System 3 and 4 are to the Slave if available Any music source can be used by either system The system is provided with an internal music source By default setting external music source is used as Music Source 1 Program 990 System Additional Information Field 20 is used to select internal music source for Music Source 1 To disable music press CLEAR at steps 3 and 6 e Program 804 External Pager BGM is used to enable disable BGM for each external pager Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Music on Hold Background Music BGM External System Programming 4 129 804 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 10 Resource Programming External Pager BGM Used to determine which external pagers will receive Background Music BGM BGM External is turned on and off by the operator e External pager number
39. To program another selection press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired selection number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END To remove all the feature numbers except selection numbers 01 through 16 1st through 16th extension blocks 1 2 Enter 100 Press NEXT System Programming 4 33 100 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering contd Conditions Feature References 3 Enter 00 Display All Feature CLR 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e There is a maximum of 16 extension blocks and 39 feature numbers for KX TD816 and 37 feature numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension block has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 Assign the leading digits for extension numbers of the respective blocks Assignment of extension blocks defines the limits for programs 003 Extension Number Set and 813 Floating Number Assignment Each feature number has one through three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and If or is included in a feature number dial pulse telephone users cannot access the feature Double entry and incompatible combinations are invalid Valid entry example 30 and 31 210 and 211 Invalid entry example 5 and 5 30 and 301 If you delete a feature number the feature cannot be used by dialing operation You can remove all the feature numbers except selections 01 through 16 To clear an extension block 01 through 16 it is required to change th
40. Unit External Music Source 2 24 Installation 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection KX TD1232 Up to two music sources such as a radio user supplied can be connected to KX TD1232 per system as illustrated below Use a two conductor plug 3 5 mm in diameter Insert the plug to the earphone headphone jack on the external music source Input impedance 8 KQ External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 f or fe D Optional Line Isolation ES peg a a Unit Notes Optional Line Isolation Unit External Music Source 1 e System Programming of music sources used for Music on Hold and Background Music is required e To adjust the sound level of the Music on Hold use the volume control on the external music source e It is an Austel requirement that an optional Line Isolation Unit obtainable from your installer be fitted between the External Music Jack and the external Music Source Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Section 3 F
41. a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming 0cccccceecceseeseeeneeeeeeteenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding No Answer Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Description If you forget to set Call Forwarding All Calls before you leave your desk this allows you to set the same function from the destination extension 3 24 Features 3 Features C Conditions e Same as the conditions of Call Forwarding All Calls e It is programmable to enable or disable this feature on Class of Service basis Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 991 COS Additional Information Field 2 Station Programming ccce
42. determined time If the timer expires ringing or an alarm tone is generated as a reminder to the user who held the call If the user is on hook and its speaker phone is off the phone is rung If the user is off hook or in speakerphone mode when the timer expires an alarm tone is sent from the built in speaker of a digital proprietary telephone DPT or from the handset receiver of a single line telephone at 15 second intervals Conditions e Hold Recall can be disabled by programming e The display PT flashes the indication of the held party for five seconds at 15 second intervals synchronized with the tone e Alarm tone is sent as follows Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time Feature References Section 3 Features Call Hold CO Line Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Call Hold Intercom Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Operation References Not applicable Host PBX Access Description The system may be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting a line from the host to a CO line in the Digital Super Hybrid System 3 70 Features 3 Features H Conditions e To enable Host PBX Access put the host PBX line in a CO line group The user accesses the host PBX by selecting that CO line e A Host PBX Access Code is required to access CO lines of the host PBX e A pause if programmed can be inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access Code and the f
43. if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold Features 3 27 C 3 Features Call Hold Intercom Description Conditions This is used to place an intercom call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension e Only one intercom call can be placed on hold in a telephone at a time up to 10 calls in the system Call Park With a proprietary telephone outside calls and one intercom call can be placed on hold at the same time With a single line telephone either one CO or intercom call can be held e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call hold 200 Hold Recall Time Section 3 Features Call Park Music on Hold Hold Recall DPT Features SLT Features Call Hold C
44. it is recommended to fill the remaining characters with or x e If there are 4 digit extension numbers available in your system add one to Message 3 e To display parts of the message which have scrolled off the display press gt or lt Section 3 Features Absent Message Capability 4 30 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 009 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Budget Management Assigns the charge limitation of a call on an extension basis e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 x all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Charge limitation Pulse 0 through 59999 All jacks 0 Pulse 1 Enter 009 Display Charge Limit 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 1 0 4 Enter a charge limitation To delete the charge limitation press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Press END e If the charge limitation is set to 0 no restriction is applied e To assign all jack numbers to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Budget Management System Programming 4 3 010
45. number Display example 01 1 CO01 Immdt 4 Enter the CO line number You can also keep pressing m gt or lt Q until the desired CO line number is displayed 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 4 118 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night conta Conditions Feature References 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END e An extension can be assigned as the destination of as many CO lines as is required e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 or step 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or for COO1 e There are six notification methods 1 Immediate ringing rings immediately 2 4 ring delay 3 6 rings delay 4 8 rings delay 5 No ring only the indicator flashes 6 Disable no incoming call e When you change the jack number by pressing NEXT or PREV the CO line number is not changed Example 03 1 CO06 Press NEXT 03 2 CO06 Section
46. programs 322 through 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Route Plan Tables 1 through 8 As we have already selected Leading Digit Table 1 select Route Plan Table 1 Enter the CO line group numbers in priority order If the specified CO line group requires digit modification designate a digit modification table number from 1 through 8 This table is required to have the system automatically add a specific carrier access code to the user dialed number Example Program 322 Route Plan Table 1 _ Time A Time B Time C_ Time D COG Modify COG Modify COG Modify COG Modify Priority 1 22 2 2 2 1 2h l Priority2 1 1 3 3 2i 2 Prioriy3 3 3 1 1 ae Table 5 COG CO Line Group Modify Modification Table Number Step 5 Make up the Digit Modification Table Carriers E F and G match CO line groups and Modification Tables as follows and have the following Access Code Carrier COG Mod Table Access Code E 1 1 1 0 333 F 2 2 1 0 555 G 3 3 1 0 666 Table 6 Features 3 9 3 Features According to Table 6 enter the Access Codes in the respective Modification Tables using the programs 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 331 ARS Modify Added Number as follows Example Program 330 Digit Modification Tables Modification Table 1 Modification Table 2 Modification Table 3 Remove 0 Add 10333 Enter the number of the R
47. to alternate Soft 1 Soft 2 Type 5 G q gt a b G Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Press SHIFT to alternate SKP SEL NEXT J lt gt SKP CLR PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Note Using the Overlay Soft 3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT You can use either the soft buttons or the overlay buttons For overlay buttons refer to Using the Overlay below Throughout the programming you will see instructions such as Press PREV If you use the soft buttons this means press SHIFT release SHIFT and then press Soft 3 The PREV function is performed If you use the soft buttons and if programming instructions tell you to press the following buttons you may press soft buttons shown below Instructions Soft button SELECT SEL SEL or SEL CLEAR CLR A programming overlay is packed with the telephone at the factory This overlay should be used at all times while in programming mode since the functions of the telephone keys change while in programming mode as follows The original names are in parentheses 4 4 System Programming 4 1 1 Using the Digital Proprietary Telephone During Operation During Programming PAUSE PROGRAM SP PHONE NEXT REDIAL PREV PREVIOUS AUTO ANSWER MUTE SELECT RECALL RECALL TRANSFER CLEAR FWD DND gt CONF INTERCOM SECRE
48. use the program 802 System Data Printout Conditions e Connect a printer provided with an EIA RS 232C interface to the EIA RS 232C connector located on the main unit After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds e When programmed for outgoing toll calls only printing occurs only for calls which start with the numbers stored in any Denied Code Table from levels 2 to 6 If ARS is employed not the user dialed but the modified number is checked against these tables e This system can store information up to 100 calls If more calls are originated or received previous records are deleted starting from the oldest one e This data is not deleted when you reset the system e If the system clock is not set by system programming or if the calendar IC is out of order the date and time is not printed out 3 108 Features 3 Features S Connection References e If Register Recall signal is manually sent out during a conversation the call record is printed and a new record is started Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 Printer Connection Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout 801 SMDR Format 802 System Data Printout 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 None Operation References Not applicabl
49. 1 Extension Connection for KX TD816 Wire Specifications Connection In making an extension line connection use twisted pair cable for installation The wire specifications for extensions are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 0 4 0 65 mm Diameter including coating 0 66 1 05 mm Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular jacks on the system Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection H High L Low R Ring T Tip L R KE H View of TEL Jack Extension Jack 8 asf fas anes ws enfant oF Jack 7 Jack 6 Jack 5 Jack 4 Jack 3 Jack 2 AHA MAAG Jack 1 4 To extensions Jacks 1 8 2 14 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 2 Extension Connection for KX TD1232 Connection Insert t
50. 1 Loosen the two screws on the right side of the main unit 2 Open the front cover in the direction of Arrow Screw Screw Screw Screw Installation 2 9 2 3 Connection 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD816 Optional Line Isolation Unit Optional Line Isolation Unit Battery Adaptor KX A46 Two car batteries connected in series e Consisting of two 12 VDC To AC Outlet Doorphone KX T30865 Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 2 10 Installation 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram KX TD1232 Battery Adaptor KX A46 gt To AC Outlet Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Doorphone 1 KX T30865 Optional Line Isolation Unit Optional Line Isolation Unit Optional Line Isolation Unit
51. 2 through 4 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 5 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 5 and 6 Level 6 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Table for Level 6 3 120 Features 3 Features Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Level 8 Allows operator calls only Flow Chart of Toll Restriction The user makes a toll call Yes Is the call made by System Speed Dialing l No No 18 TRS Override for System lt Speed Dialing enabled Yes Levels 7 8 What is the extension toll Level 1 restriction level s Levels 2 3 4 5 6 T No Is the dialed number found in gt applicable Denied Code Tables Yes Is the dialed number found in Yes applicable Excepted Code Tables No y The call is denied Reorder Tone is returned to the user The call is allowed Features T Conditions 3 Features e Toll restriction checks are applied to the following 1 Account Code Entry 2 Automatic Route Selection ARS 3 Dial Access Automatic 4 Line Access CO Line Group 5 Line Access Individual 6 System Speed Dialing e Emergency call numbers such as Police or Fire Dep
52. 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Ringing Delayed Night Service System Programming 4 119 605 606 4 8 Extension Programming Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Determines the CO lines which can be accessed by an extension in both day and night modes The extension users can make outgoing outside calls using the assigned CO lines e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 X all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Enabl enable Disab disable All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Enable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 605 for day or 606 for night Display example CO Out Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 CO01 Enabl 4 Enter the desired CO line number or keep pressing m gt or lt until the desired CO line is displayed To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Press STORE 7 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 8 Repeat steps 4 throug
53. 4 123 609 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 8 Extension Programming Voice Mail Access Codes Assigns a mailbox number for each extension only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Mailbox number 16 digits max All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 609 Display Mailbox ID Code 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a mailbox number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e The system supports a maximum of eight jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for connection to a Voice Processing System as the Voice Ma
54. 5 F2 1 F7 6 F3 2 F8 7 F4 3 F9 8 F5 4 F10 9 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Station speed dialing Station speed dialing programming Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Station Speed Dialing System Connection Description System Connection allows two main units KX TD1232 to work together as one system This expands the capacity of the system number of extensions CO lines and so on Two connected systems are called the master and the slave systems Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 111 S 3 Features A maximum capacity of the system is as follows Item Maximum Quantity Maximum Quantity Single System System Connection CO Line 12 24 Extension Jack 32 64 DSS Console 4 8 Doorphone 2 4 Door Opener 2 4 External Pager 2 4 Music Source 2 4 Conditions e The following resources can be used by either system a External pagers b Music sources used for Music on Hold c Music sources used for Background Music BGM d Station Message Detail Recording SMDR EIA RS 232C ports e Call Parking areas e System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 optional expansion cards to connect both systems must be installed for this feature Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 10 System Connection Programming References
55. Alerting mode The SLT is disabled DPT rings but the SLT does not ring However the SLT can answer the phone Features 3 93 P 3 Features e When the SLT is in operation the display and LED indicator on the paired DPT will show in the same way as if the DPT is in operation e If eXtra Device Port feature is available a DPT SLT can act as completely different extensions e Call Waiting tone can be heard only by DPT Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Parallel telephone mode set cancel Feature References Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Paralleled Telephone Connection Pause Insertion Automatic Description This function is used to insert a pre assigned pause between the CO line access number the host PBX or carrier access code and the successively dialed digits Conditions e This feature requires previous programming of CO line access number and host PBX access codes as well as assignment of the pause duration e This feature works for Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Pickup Dialing Call Forwarding to CO Line as well as for ordinary calls e Pressing the PAUSE button in dialing number inserts a pause for a pre assigned time Programming References Section 4 System
56. Assignment All CO Lines Disable 419 CO Line Name Assignment All CO Lines Not Stored 420 Reverse Circuit Assignment All CO Lines Regular 430 DID Table Number Assignment All CO Line Groups Not Stored 431 DID Incoming Assignment All DID Tables Wink 432 DID Outgoing Assignment All DID Tables Wink 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed All DID Tables RMV 0 Digit and Received Digit DID Table 1 RCV 1 Other DID Tables RCV 3 434 DID Added Number All DID Tables Not Stored 435 DID Wink Time Assignment All DID Tables 16 436 Pay Tone Assignment All CO Lines Disable COS Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day All COS Level 1 Day Night Night 5 6 List Available for KX TD1232 only 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration All COS Disable Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line All COS Enable 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line All COS Disable 507 Do Not Disturb Override All COS Disable 508 Account Code Entry Mode All COS Option Extension Programming 600 EXtra Device Port All Jacks Disable 601 Class of Service All Jacks 1 2 COS 1 602 Extension Group Assignment All Jacks 1 2 Extension Group 1 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed All Jacks 1 2 All CO Lines Immediate Ringing Day Night Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night
57. Default Programming Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF signals RBT ringback tone This signal is sent when calling an BT busy tone ROT reorder tone DND DND tone Answer Disconnect extension This is sent when the called extension is busy This is sent when the dialed number is invalid This is sent when the other extension has DND assigned This is sent when the other extension answers the call This is sent when the other extension hangs up Confirm confirmation tone This is sent when the feature number for Message Waiting Lamp is valid FWD VM RBT FWD to VM ringback tone Not available reserved FWD VM BT FWD to VM busy tone This is sent when the called extension has set Call Forwarding to VPS FWD EXT RBT FWD to extension ringback tone Not available reserved e RBT BT ROT DND Answer Disconnect Confirm FWD VM RBT FWD VM BT FWD EXT RBT e DTMF signal number 3 digits max RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 1 Enter 113 Display VM Status Set 2 Press NEXT to program ringback tone status To program another status keep pressing NEXT until the desired statu
58. Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Starts or stops printing of the system working report Start Stop Not applicable 1 Enter 815 Display SWR Data Dump 2 Press NEXT Display Print Out Start 3 Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing in the middle of printing press SELECT and go to step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 4 Press STORE Display Print Out Stop 5 Press END e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds Otherwise the usage of the EIA port is changed to system programming and printout will not occur e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Section 3 Features System Working Report 4 136 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 816 System Working Report Clear Description Clears all the recorded data of the System Working Reports Selection None Default Not applicable Programming 1 Enter 816 Display SWR Data Clear 2 Press NEXT Display Clear 3 Press STORE System Working Report is cleared 4 Press END Conditions None Feature References Section 3 Features System Working Report System Programming 4 137 990 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Informati
59. Field 16 Features 3 33 C 3 Features Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Deny Description Allows the user to prohibit other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his her extension by using the call pickup features Conditions Distinctive dial tone is sent to the user on the extension with this feature when the user goes off hook Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup deny set cancel Feature References Section 3 Features Call Pickup CO Line Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Directed Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Pickup Deny Call Splitting Description Allows the extension user to alternate between two other parties Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a conversation with the other party Conditions Call Splitting is impossible during Doorphone Call or Paging Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Splitting 3 34 Features 3 Features C CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call Transfer features allow the user to transfer a call to another party This operation can be screened or unscreened Screened call transfer is used when you want to announce the call to the other party before
60. Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line group basis e The DPT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each L CO button by system or station programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cceeceecceseesseeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Loop CO L CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Feature References Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Direct LED Indication CO Line Ringing Delayed 3 18 Features 3 Features B Operation References User Manual Line Access Automatic Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons DPT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Button Single CO S CO Description Conditions A Single CO S CO button is a CO line access button This allows the digital proprietary telephone user to access a specific line by pressing an S CO button An incoming call can be directed to an S CO button e The default setting for CO buttons is changeable Flexible CO Button e An S CO button provides CO line status e It is possible to assign one CO line to both an S CO and a G CO button e If Automatic R
61. KX T7230 two pair KX T7240 2 12 Installation 2 3 2 CO Line Connection x rps16 CO1 through C04 Wire Specifications Use twisted pair cable for installation The wire specifications for extensions are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 00 4 60 65 mm 22 24 2AWG Diameter including coating 90 66 1 05 mm Connection Insert the modular plugs of the telephone line cords 4 conductor wiring into the modular jacks on the system R Ring T Tip T2 A R1 TI NR2 View of TEL Jack CO T1 R1 T2 R2 IN KJ 003 co4 01 C02 Use 4 conductor wiring cord 4 To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Notes e Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection e Optional card or unit is required to connect CO lines to KX TD1232 See Section 2 4 Optional Cards and Units Installation Installation 2 13 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16
62. KX TD816 1 KX TD1232 1 through 4 e Disable sends no BGM Enable sends BGM All external pagers Disable 1 Enter 804 Display Ext Pag BGM 2 Press NEXT Display Pager NO gt 3 Enter an external pager number To enter pager number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Pagerl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another pager press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired external pager number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e For KX TD816 one external pager can be installed Please skip steps 6 and 7 e The external pager is a user supplied item For KX TD1232 two external pagers can be installed per system External pagers 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e Program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment is used to assign an extension as an operator e Program 803 Music Source Use is used to select the music source to be used for BGM Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External 4 130 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Description Used to remove the confirmation tone for external pagers The default setting sends confirmation tone 2 to the external pagers before paging is broadcast This programming applies to all the external pagers Selection On Off Default On
63. No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable System Data Default Set Description This system permits re initialization of system programmed data If all the programmed data is cleared the system will restart with the default setting Conditions The default setting for each programming item is listed in Section 5 2 Default Values Programming References No programming required 3 112 Features 3 Features S Feature References None Operation References Section 2 Installation 2 8 System Data Clear System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Description Conditions This system can be programmed and administered using a personal computer The EIA Remote Programming amp Diagnosis floppy is required to perform this feature The KX TD816 cannot perform the diagnosis There are two programming methods On Site Programming By connecting a personal computer PC to your system system programming and maintenance can be performed locally There are two ways available to perform the above Method 1 Using the EIA RS 232C port Connect the PC to the EIA RS 232C port provided The main unit has an EIA RS 232C port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR Method 2 Using a modem Remote Card is required already installed in the main unit Connect the PC to an extension jack Assign the floating number of the modem in system progr
64. Number Name Assignment KX T7235 only Feature References Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manual Station Speed Dialing System Feature Access Menu Description This feature provides a display of the system features available at any time and allows the user to have access to the desired features Conditions e The features available to access are Absent Message Capability Call Pickup Group Call Forwarding set cancel Do Not Disturb set cancel 3 104 Features 3 Features S Message Waiting Paging access answer Paralleled Telephone e In addition to the features above the operator can have the display of the following features Background Music BGM External Call Park Night Service Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manual System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialing Description A list of the names stored for System Speed Dialing is displayed This allows the user to dial by name without having to know the telephone number All the user needs to do is pressing the button associated with the desired name Conditions e The numbers and names for System Speed Dialing must be programmed e If a name is not stored for a number it is not displayed and cannot be called with this feature Programming References S
65. Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access ARS CO line group line access 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Feature References Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Toll Restriction Operation References Not applicable 3 94 Features 3 Features P Pickup Dialing Description Allows an extension user to make an outgoing call by going off hook if the user has previously stored the telephone number This feature is also known as Hot Line Conditions e ALD telephone without the button cannot program this feature For programming the phone number replace the LD telephone to the telephone with the button temporarily e The user uses a feature number to enable or disable pickup dialing e If the feature is enabled and the user goes off hook dial tone is generated for the waiting time and then dialing starts During the waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Pickup Dialing function e If the user answers an incoming call or retrieves a call on hold the Pickup Dialing feature does not work Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Pickup dialing program set cancel 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Pickup Dialing Hot Line Power Failure Restart Description Returning on electricity the system restarts the stored data automatically
66. References No programming required None Not applicable 3 84 Features 3 Features M Module Expansion Description Conditions Connection References The KX TD816 starts with 4 CO line and 8 extension jacks The KX TD1232 starts with 16 extension jacks They can be expanded by installing expansion cards and units e A 8 Station Line Unit adds 8 extension jacks e A 8 CO Line Card adds 8 CO line jacks e A 4 CO Line Unit adds 4 CO line jacks e A 4 DID Line Unit adds 4 DID line jacks A 4 ISDN SO Line Card adds 4 ISDN SO lines e A 2 ISDN SO Line Unit adds 2 ISDN SO lines The KX TD816 can have one 8 Station Line Unit and one of 4 CO Line Unit 4 DID Line Unit or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit The KX TD1232 can have one of 8 CO Line Card or 4 ISDN SO Line Card a maximum of two 8 Station Line Units and one of 4 CO Line Unit 4 DID Line Unit or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit e The number of extension jacks may be different from the number of telephones if the Paralleled Telephone or the eXtra Device Port feature is enabled These features allow one extension jack to have two telephones e When an expansion unit is installed the unit identification is set by system programming Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 4 8 Station Line Unit Connection 2 4 5 4 CO Line Unit Connection 2 4 6 4 DID Line Unit Connection 2 4 7 2 ISDN SO Line Unit Connection Programming References Featur
67. References No programming required 3 48 Features 3 Features D Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Dial Type Selection Description Conditions Allows you to select the desired dialing mode for each CO line regardless of the type of extension originating the call pulse or tone There are three dialing modes available DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency Mode The dialing signal from an extension either in tone or pulse is converted to tone dialing DTMF signals are transmitted to the CO line Pulse Dial Rotary Mode The dialing signal from an extension either in tone or pulse is converted to pulse dialing Pulse signals are transmitted to the CO line Call Blocking Mode Set this mode on CO lines that can receive both tone and pulse but under contract with the Central Office for pulse dialing only When dialing to the line using an MF4 telephone only pulse signals are sent to the Central Office It is possible for the extension user to temporarily convert the pre assigned pulse dialing mode to DTMF mode Pulse to Tone Conversion DTMF mode cannot be changed to pulse In case a CO line can receive both DTMF and pulse signals and is contracted for DTMF with a Central Office DTMF mode should be selected for the line If it is contracted for pulse dialing mode Call Blocking mode should be selected for the line If a line is assigned Pulse Dial mode select an appropriate pulse speed
68. References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 508 Account Code Entry Mode Station Programming ccccccceecceseeeeeeeteeeeenteeeeeees User Manual Charge Fee Reference Feature References Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Operation References User Manual DPT Features SLT Features Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing Description Allows you to cancel Toll Restriction on System Speed Dialing Normally calls originated by System Speed Dialing are restricted depending on the extension s toll restriction level Once this function is enabled it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialing calls with no restriction Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Station Programming 0cccccceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeaeees User Manual Charge Account Code Set Feature References Section 3 Features System Speed Dialing Toll Restriction Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Toll Restriction Override Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing 3 124 Features 3 Features T Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description Conditions Connection References A tone signal is sent from the external pager when an incomin
69. Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approxi mately within 10 seconds C If the system still does not work switch the power off and on again after five minutes D If the system still does not work 1 Switch the power off Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position Switch the power on Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool Set the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds E If the system still does not work switch the power off If car batteries are connected to the system disconnect them too Then consult an authorized service person na amp Ww bv When the power supply stops single line telephones are auto matically connected straight to specific CO lines KX TD816 CO 1 is connected to the extension jack 1 CO 2 is connected to the extension jack 2 CO 5 is connected to Power Failure Transfer jack KX TD1232 three SLTs can be connected to CO 1 CO 2 and CO 9 which are connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks 6 6 Troubleshooting Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Ltd Central P O Box 288 Osaka 530 91 Japan Printed in Japan PQQX11289XA S1294MT3108CK
70. The number of unanswered incoming calls e The ratio of the answered calls to the incoming calls Number of answered calls x 1 Number of incoming calls i e The average time from receipt of call to answer of the incoming and answered calls e The average duration time of talk of the answered calls 3 Outgoing calls e The number of access requested e The number of access succeeded e The number of access failed e The ratio of access succeeded Number of access succeeded x1 Number of access requested 00 e The average duration of the dialed calls These records can be deleted by system programming and new data will be recorded thereafter Conditions Connect a printer provided with an EIA RS 232C connector located on the main unit After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 8 Printer Connection 3 116 Features 3 Features Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 815 System Working Report Printout 816 System Working Report Clear Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Time Out Variable Description Provides timers to control various features or functions The following timers are programmable System Timer Items Range Automatic Redial Interval Time n l0s n 3 120 Automatic
71. There is maximum of 10 emergency numbers Each number has a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Toll Restriction System Programming 4 73 312 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Mode Allows you to turn on or off the Automatic Route Selection ARS mode ARS if enabled selects the least expensive route to be used for an outside call On Off Off 1 Enter 312 Display ARS Mode 2 Press NEXT Display example ARS Off 3 Press SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e If Off is selected the Automatic Line Access feature functions in place of ARS e Programs 313 through 331 are used to program ARS Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Line Access Automatic 4 74 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 313 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References ARS Time Assigns times for the four ARS time schedules It is possible to split a day into four time zones maximum so that the least expensive line is selected for that time According to the service hours and charges offered by your carriers enter the starting time of each zone e Time schedule Time A Time B Time C Time D Time hour 1 through 12 Disable no schedule e A
72. a CO line group Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 89 411 4 6 CO Line Programming Host PBX Access Codes Description Selection Default Programming Assigns Host PBX access codes If the system is installed behind a host PBX system an access code is required to make an outside call Up to four codes can be stored for a CO line group assigned the line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 x all CO line groups e Access code 1 or 2 digits four different entries max All CO line groups Not stored 1 Enter 411 Display TRG Host PBX NO 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRGI r r 4 Enter an access code To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new access code Display example TRG1 01 i 5 To enter more access codes for the same CO line group press m and enter the access codes until all the required entries are completed Display example TRG1 01 08 10 22 6 Press STORE 7 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 9 Press END 4 90 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes contd Conditions Feature References e This program is
73. ay De Two car batteries connected in series Battery Adaptor Connector Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit 1 8 System Outline 15 Specifications 1 5 1 General Description System Capacity KX TD816 CO lines SDN SO lines 8 max 2 max Extensions 16 max 32 max with XDP KX TD1232 CO lines ISDN SO lines 12 max 6 max Extensions 32 max 64 max with XDP Control Method Stored Program CPU 16 bits CPU Switching Non Blocking PCM Time Sharing Switch Power Supplies Primary 240 VAC 50 Hz Secondary Station Supply Volt 30V Circuit Volt 5V 15V Power Failure e Memory back up duration seven years by factory provided lithium battery e 3 CO lines max automatically assigned to SLTs Power Failure Transfer e System operation for several hours by recommended batteries consisting of two 12 VDC car batteries Dialing Outward Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing Internal Dial Pulse DP 10 pps 20 pps Tone DTMF Dialing Mode Conversion DP DTMF DTMF DP Connector KX TD816 CO lines Modular jack Extensions Modular jack KX TD1232 CO lines 4 pin connector Extensions Amphenol connector Paging Output Pin Jack RCA JACK External Music Input Two conductors Jack MINIJACK 3 5 mm diameter System Outline 1 9 15 Specifications Extension Connection Cable Single line telephones 1 pair
74. button e This feature does not work for calls from outside parties or doorphone calls e Handsfree Answerback set on a telephone overrides the Ring Voice Intercom Alerting mode preset on the telephone Handsfree conversation mode is established as soon as confirmation tone is sent Programming Reference No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Operation References DPT Features User Manual Handsfree Answerback Handsfree Operation Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to dial and to talk to the other party without lifting the handset Pressing an appropriate button provides handsfree mode Conditions e This function can be utilized by pressing a button listed below when the SP PHONE MONITOR button indicator is off SP PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button e The KX T7250 can be used for handsfree dialing operations etc but cannot be used for handsfree conversation e A single press of a One Touch Button DSS button REDIAL button or a SAVE button also provides handsfree mode if Full One Touch Dialing is enabled Programming References No programming required Features 3 69 H 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialing Operation References DPT Features User Manual Handsfree Operation Hold Recall Description Prevents a call on hold from being kept waiting longer than a pre
75. can answer your Paging External Conditions e Previous connection of an external pager is required e External pagers can be used for TAFAS Paging External or Background Music BGM External in this order For example if Paging External is overridden by TAFAS reorder tone is returned to the performer of the Paging External If BGM is overridden by another higher priority it is interrupted and starts again when the higher priority is finished If System Connection is established up to four pagers are available The confirmation tone is sent to the extensions and external pager when the paging is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Pager Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Paging External Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer 3 92 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features P Paging Group Description Conditions Allows you to select an extension group and make a voice announcement All
76. card cover from Fix the adaptor card by a screw included the main unit Then attach the nylon belt ji co belt amp Screw a ooonnooonnn oooo000000 2 Insert the battery and adaptor card into the 4 Connect the cord of battery to the adaptor frame card Remove the backup battery connector cover on the main unit Then connect the cord of the adaptor card to the backup battery connector Backup Battery oofooooobe a Hbooonpaanoa Adaptor Card Note Make sure of the polarities of the battery Backup Battery Connector Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 51 2 4 12 Battery Adaptor Connection Connection User supplied car batteries can be used as a backup power supply in th
77. e TEER 3 118 POU ESENTI a AEE NA EEE E A E 3 119 Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry seeeeseeeeeeeeeee 3 123 Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing eee 3 124 Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS cee 3 125 U Unattended Conference Conference Unattended 3 44 Unscreened Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension cceeeeeeeeees 3 36 V Voice Mail Integration 5 ccsscysicctasadcccessavesteseesnecassavestasecssaetessactesheceene 3 126 Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer 3 131 Section 4 System Programming 4 1 General Programming Instructions cccccsssccsssscssssccsessceees 4 2 4 1 1 Using the Digital Proprietary Telephone e ee eeeeeeeeeeee 4 3 4 1 2 Programming Ways co cisiveiacdscendtesyives ssnenegetds eeiaessousedacesdesoneeen 4 7 41 3 Entering Characters 1 22 c0tce us even ie T E 4 9 4 1 4 User Programming Mode vssjccsssajecassecaccas sate ascacaeinasansentadastncees 4 12 4 1 5 Example of Programming ccceecceceecceeseeceeeeeeeseeeeeenaeeees 4 13 4 2 Manager Programming cccccsssccssssssssssscssssssssssssssssssssssssssssecees 4 15 000 Date and Time Set 0 0 0 eececscsesseseessssssssssessssssssssseseeees 4 15 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set eeeeeeseeeesteeeenees 4 17 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeenaees 4
78. for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual None DPT Features SLT Features Call Pickup CO Line Call Pickup Directed Description Conditions Allows any extension user to answer a call ringing at any other extension e Doorphone calls can be picked up from extensions that are not programmed to answer doorphone calls e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup directed 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT Features Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup Group Description Conditions Allows the extension user to answer a call that is ringing at another telephone if the call is ringing within the user s extension group e The user can pick up an incoming outside intercom or doorphone call e The priority of Group Call Pickup is as follows Outside call gt Transferred call gt Extension call gt Doorphone call e Group Call Pickup starts with the lowest jack number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup group 990 System Additional Information
79. four DSS Consoles per system System Connection permits eight DSS Consoles Each DSS Console must be assigned to a DSS Console jack and paired with a digital proprietary telephone jack in the same system For KX TD816 DSS Consoles 1 through 4 must be assigned to a jack number between 02 and 16 For KX TD1232 DSS Consoles 1 through 4 must be assigned to a jack number between 02 and 32 and DSS Consoles 5 through 8 must be assigned to a jack number between 33 and 64 if available DSS Consoles in the out of service system are unassignable Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable The jack number for the Console and that for the paired extension must be entered together Multiple DSS Consoles cannot be assigned to the same DSS Console jack Multiple DSS Consoles can be paired with the same digital proprietary telephone jack A DSS Console jack cannot be assigned the jack 01 and the jack number of Manager set in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment If all incoming CO calls are set to ring at the operator extension telephone in program 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night assigning the DSS Consoles to the operator extension makes the operator s job much easier Section 3 Features DSS Console KX T7240 4 28 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 2 Manager Programming 008 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Absent Messages
80. idle one is found regardless of jack number Termination hunting The extensions are hunted until reaching the extension which has the highest jack number in the group 3 106 Features 3 Features S Conditions VM hunting All the VM ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit VM Service AA hunting All the AA ports are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service One of the hunting types is selected for each extension group e If all the searched extensions are busy a busy tone is sent to the caller e If the called extension has set Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding Station Hunting skips the extension Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 602 Extension Group Assignment Section 3 Features Extension Group Voice Mail Integration Operation References Not applicable Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Station Message Detail Recording SMDR automatically records detailed call information for outside calls A printer connected to the EIA RS 232C port can be used to print incoming and outgoing outside calls as well as print a hard copy of the system programming To print the call records use the program 800 SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout which allows you to print out the following records e Records of all outgoing outside calls or outgoing toll calls e Record of incoming outside calls
81. in Field 21 if needed Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection System Programming 4 83 403 4 6 CO Line Programming Pulse Speed Selection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References A CO line set for pulse or call blocking mode in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can have two pulse rates 10 pps low and 20 pps high This program sets the pulse speed for each CO line set to pulse or call blocking mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e 10 pps 20 pps All CO lines 10 pps 1 Enter 403 Display Pulse Speed 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 10pps 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 e The pulse speed required is determined by the CO or PBX line e Program 990 System Additional Information
82. information assigned to the button for five seconds Conditions e Display examples 1 If REDIAL SAVE or One Touch Dialing button is pressed the stored number is displayed 950 1001PP123456 2 If the DSS or MESSAGE button is pressed the extension number and the name if assigned stored under the DSS button or the source of the Message Waiting is displayed 223 Tony 3 If Account button is pressed the display shows Account 4 If FWD DND button is pressed the selected feature assigned on the button is shown as follows a If the Do Not Disturb feature is assigned Do Not Disturb b If Call Forwarding All Calls to extension 223 is assigned FWD A11 Ext223 c If Call Forwarding Busy to extension 234 is assigned FWD BSY Ext234 d If Call Forwarding No Answer to extension 345 is assigned FWD NA Ext345 e If Call Forwarding Busy No Answer to extension 200 is assigned FWD B NA Ext200 3 54 Features 3 Features D f If Call Forwarding to CO Line number 91201431 is assigned FWD CO 91201431 e If the display characters exceed 16 digits the mark amp is shown at the right hand edge e This is used to display the data programmed for each PF Programmable Feature DSS SAVE or REDIAL button If Full One Touch Dialing is enabled on the telephone Full One Touch Dialing will be active instead Programming References No programming required Feature References
83. is not in a pair A B A B CO line DSHS 6 1 3 Operation PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION When using the speaker phone monitor mode with a The HEADSET mode is selected by station pro When the headset is not used select the HANDSET mode by Selector is set to OFF DPT KX T7220 KX gramming station programming T7230 KX T7235 KX T72 Handset Headset 50 nothing is audible Selection The unit does not ring The Ringer Volume Set to HIGH or LOW During a power interrup tion extensions connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks do not operate e A DPT is connected to the jack e The dialing mode tone or pulse is improper e Disconnect the DPT and connect a single line telephone e Set the Tone Pulse switch to the other position 6 4 Troubleshooting 6 1 Troubleshooting PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION During system connection operation originating an intercom outside call from a system to the other system is not possible Connect the interface between the systems and press the Reset Button on both systems Interface between the systems is disconnected Originating an outside call Call Transfer or Conference cannot be performed The corresponding CO button does not exist on the proprietary telephone Program the CO button See Section 4 2 005 Flex
84. making a call 1 The first digit has not been dialed within 10 seconds 2 After a digit is dialed the next one is not dialed within five seconds Intercom call only Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Background Music BGM Description Allows the proprietary telephone user to listen to background music from the monitor speaker on the telephone Conditions e It may be required to select a music source used for BGM by system programming One external music source can be connected to KX TD816 and up to two sources can be connected to KX TD1232 per system e For Music Source 1 it is possible to select the internal or external music source by system programming e The music is interrupted while off hooked Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Feature References Section 3 Features Music on Hold 3 12 Features 3 Features B Operation References User Manual DPT Features Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Description Conditions Connection References Background music BGM can be broadcasted in your office through external pagers The BGM can be turned on and off by the operator only e It is required to connect an external pa
85. multiple calls are received simultaneously 3 Ringing Line Preference When you go off hook you answer the call ringing at your telephone e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e If Prime Line Preference is selected and an incoming call arrives from a line other than the prime line it cannot be answered just by going off hook The Prime Line should be assigned to the Single CO button e If Ringing Line Preference is selected going off hook does not answer a line programmed for no ring even though there is an incoming call Going off hook during the delay time does not answer a line programmed for delayed ringing e A single line telephone is always set to Ringing Line Preference and cannot be changed 3 80 Features 3 Features L Programming References Station Programming ccccecceecceseeeeseeteeeeeeeeneeees User Manual Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Feature References None Operation References Basic Operation User Manual Receiving Calls Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line Description A digital proprietary telephone user can select a desired outgoing line preference to originate calls from the following three line preferences 1 Idle Line Preference When you go off hook you are connected to an idle line An idle line is automatically selected from the pre assigned lines 2 No Line Preference No line is selected wh
86. on an outgoing outside call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released Time seconds 5 through 120 10s 1 4 5 Enter 207 Display lst Digit Time Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time Press STORE Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction System Programming 4 63 208 4 4 Timer Programming Inter Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing toll call If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this time the DTMF receiver is released This timer applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed Time seconds 5 through 30 10s 1 Enter 208 Display Inter Digit Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This timer is used for toll restriction checking e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Toll Restriction 4 64 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times Description Sets the number of times Automatic Redial is tried Automatic redialing of
87. only required if a host PBX line is connected to the system Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign the line to a CO line group There is a maximum of four access codes per CO line group Each code has one or two digits consisting of 0 through 9 and x If conflicting access codes such as 8 and 81 are stored for the same CO line group the 1 digit code 8 only will be in effect When the programmed codes are dialed Automatic Pause Insertion and Toll Restriction are applied to the calls The programmed pause time in program 412 Pause Time is automatically inserted after the access code To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Host PBX Access System Programming 4 9 412 4 6 CO Line Programming Pause Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the pause time The programmed pause time is automatically inserted after a line access code or a host PBX access code programmed in 411 Host PBX Access Codes or manually inserted if the PAUSE button is pressed by the user e CO line group number 1 through 8 all CO line groups e Time seconds 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 All CO line groups 1 5 s 1 Enter 412 Display TRG Pause T
88. other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb set cancel Station Programming cceccceecceseereeeteeeseenteeeseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding Busy Features 3 23 C 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Description Your calls are forwarded to another extension if your extension is busy or you do not answer the call in a pre determined time Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DIL 1 1 Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates the same way as Call Forwarding Busy and Call Forwarding No Answer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group
89. screw to this position Drive the screw to this position 3 Hook the main unit on the screw heads 4 Hook the main unit on the screw heads Installation 2 7 2 2 4 Wall Mounting KX TD1232 Mounting on Wooden Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the four screw positions 2 Install the four screws included into the wall Drive the screw to this position 3 Hook the main unit on the screw heads Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the four screw positions 2 Drill four holes and drive the anchor plugs included with a hammer flush to the wall To the wall surface Concrete Wall 3 Install the four screws included into the anchor plugs Drive the screw to this position 4 Hook the main unit on the screw heads Q Q Q PLL LL 2 8 Installation 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 5 Frame Earth Connection IMPORTANT You must connect the frame of the main unit to Earth O a To Earth 2 2 6 Opening Front Cover Two screws are attached to the front cover by springs so that they will not be lost To open the front cover of the main unit
90. sequence is finished and the call is established e If the dial type of the line is assigned to dial pulse Tone Through mode is established after the dialing sequence is finished and the buttons are pressed Pulse to Tone Conversion e This function also applies to extension and conference calls Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Pulse to Tone Conversion Operation References Not applicable Extension Group Description The system supports 16 extension groups Any member of an extension group can pick up a call directed to another group member Group Call Pickup In addition there are Paging Group and Station Hunting features 3 62 Features 3 Features E Conditions e Every extension should belong to an extension group but cannot belong to more than one group If System Connection is employed an extension group can include extensions on both systems Programming References Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type 602 Extension Group Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Station Hunting Paging Group Operation References Not applicable External Feature Access Description Allows the extension user to have access to the features of a host PBX or Central Office such as Call Waiting etc Register Recall signal can be sent out to the CO line Conditions e This featur
91. through 499 e Name 10 characters max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 002 Display SPD Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Speed dial numbers are programmed in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set e There is a maximum of 500 names Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e The stored names are applied to the CO Incoming Call Information Display Log feature e To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 Section 3 Features Special Display Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing System Programming 4 19 003 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Number Set Assigns an extension number to each extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Extension Number 2 through 4 dig
92. transmitted to a VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port AA SVC Automated Attendant Service If AA Service is set to Start in program 990 field 10 the AA SVC command is sent toa VM port if an incoming outside call is answered by the VM port e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 609 990 field 10 990 field 18 2 Hearing the message at the extension If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button indicator of the concerned telephone the telephone user can hear the message by pressing the MESSAGE button e Required entries selections GETMSG Get Message This command is transmitted toa VM port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted preceding the GETMSG command above This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the MESSAGE indicator e Other programming required program addresses 609 990 field 18 B If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant AA Service An AA port answers an incoming outside call to provide AA services such as call transfer receiving a message e Required entries selections VM SVC Voice Mail Service The VM SVC command is a code transmitted before LV MSG code if Operator transfers a call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that the AA port can be s
93. turn up or down the following volumes as desired Handset receiver volume Headset volume Ringer volume Speaker volume Conditions With a digital proprietary telephone press the volume control button VOLUME v UP DOWN to select a desired volume level However the ringer volume of KX T7220 and KX T7250 is selected with Ringer Volume Selector OFF LOW HIGH Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Configuration User Manual Volume Control Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Speaker Features 3 131 Section 4 System Programming This section provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone 4 1 General Programming Instructions Default Setting This system has a default factory setting If any of the programming needs to be changed you will find the necessary information in Section 3 Features This makes the system very simple to install and customize as required by the customer Any required changes can be written on Programming Tables Required Telephone Set One of the following digital proprietary telephone DPT is required for system programming KX T7235 KX T7230 Extensions Used for Programming Connect one of the above mentioned telephone sets to either of the following e Jack number 1 e Jack programmed as a manager extension To assign the manager extension see Section 4 2 006 Operator Manager Extension A
94. work for a maximum of eight seconds e If an SLT is connected to an XDP enabled jack neither telephones work e If XDP is disabled for the jack DPT and SLT may be used as Paralleled Telephones Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 5 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Feature References Section 3 Features Paralleled Telephone Operation References Not applicable Flexible Numbering Description The numbers used for the access codes of system features and the number used for extension numbers are not fixed They can be set as required provided there are not any conflicts Feature numbers can be from one to three digits utilizing numbers 0 through 9 as well as x and Extension numbers can be two to four digits in length Any number can be set as the leading first or second digit If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have 2 digit numbers and some have 3 digit numbers If two digits are assigned as the leading digits some have 3 digit numbers and some have 4 digit numbers 3 64 Features 3 Features Flexible Feature Numbers F Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 2 02 2nd hundred extension block 3 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension blo
95. 07 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Assigns the jack numbers for the DSS Console and the paired extension e DSS Console number KX TD816 1 through 4 KX TD1232 1 through 4 for Master 5 through 8 for Slave e Jack number for DSS Console KX TD816 02 through 16 KX TD1232 02 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave e Jack number for paired extension KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 32 for Master 33 through 64 for Slave All DSS Consoles Not stored 1 Enter 007 Display DSS Console Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DSS NO gt 3 Enter a DSS Console number To enter DSS Console number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example DSS 1 P 4 Enter a jack number for the console To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 5 Press gt 6 Enter a jack number for the paired extension To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number Display example DSS 1 02 P 03 7 Press STORE 8 To program another DSS Console press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DSS Console number System Programming 4 27 007 4 2 Manager Programming DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment conta Conditions Feature References 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END e There is a maximum of
96. 1 through 435 Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 102 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 431 DID Incoming Assignment Description Assigns DID incoming method immediate or wink to each DID table in accordance with the service of your central office Immediate Incoming DID call can be received right after receiving signal arrives Wink Incoming DID call can be received after the wink signal is transmitted to the central office after receiving signal arrives Selection e DID table number 1 through 4 x all DID tables e Immediate Wink Default All DID tables Wink Programming 1 Enter 431 Display DID In Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DID Table NO gt 3 Enter a DID table number To enter DID table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another DID table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all DID tables to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID table number 1 Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID System Programming 4 103 432 4 6 CO Line Programming DID Outgoing Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Fea
97. 1 Emergency Dial Set Location 01 114 Location 02 000 312 ARS Mode Off 313 ARS Time Time A 8 00 am Time B 5 00 pm Time C 9 00 pm Time D Disable 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Not Stored Plans 1 through 8 List 5 5 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Not Stored 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit All Modification Tables 0 digits 331 ARS Modify Added Number Not Stored CO Line Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment All CO Lines Connect 401 CO Line Group Assignment CO01 TRG 1 CO02 TRG 2 CO03 TRG 3 CO04 TRG 4 CO05 TRG 5 CO06 TRG 6 CO07 TRG 7 KX TD816 COO8 TRG 8 KX TD1232 CO08 through CO24 TRG8 402 Dial Mode Selection All CO Lines DTMF 403 Pulse Speed Selection All CO Lines 10 pps 404 DTMF Time All CO Lines 80 ms 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set All CO Lines 352 ms All CO Lines Disable Day Night All CO Line Groups Disable Day Night Host PBX Access Codes Not Stored 412 Pause Time All CO Line Groups 1 5 s 413 Register Recall Signal Time All CO Line Groups 96 ms 414 Disconnect Time All CO Line Groups 2 0 s 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Disable 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment All CO Lines Not Stored 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service All CO Lines Enable Assignment 418 ISDN DDI Service
98. 1 through 24 all CO lines e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 CO01 TRG 1 CO05 TRG 5 C002 TRG2 CO06 TRG 6 C003 TRG 3 C007 TRG 7 CO04 TRG 4 CO08 TRG 8 for KX TD816 CO08 through CO24 TRG 8 for KX TD1232 1 Enter 401 Display Trunk Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 TRG1 4 Enter the CO line group number To change the current entry enter the new CO line group number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one CO line group press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Section 3 Features CO Line Group 4 82 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Description Each CO line can be programmed for DTMF pulse rotary or call blocking This program assigns your choice to each line DTMF The dialing signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to tone signals and transmitted to the CO line Pulse The dialing signals from an extension either tone or pulse are converted to pulse signals and transmitted
99. 19 Display CO Line Name 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 CO01 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e There is a maximum of 24 names Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Section 3 Features Display Call Information 4 100 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 420 Reverse Circuit Assignment Description Enables or disables to detect Reverse Circuit Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Regular no detection Reverse detection Default All CO lines Regular Programming 1 Enter 420 Display Reverse Circuit 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also pre
100. 19 003 Extension Number Set c ccccccccscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeees 4 20 004 Extension Name Set ccccccccccscsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseseseeees 4 22 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment ceeceeeseceeeseeeeeteeeennees 4 24 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment ceeceeeeeee 4 26 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 4 27 008 Absent Messages yisissccccdseaccisasdeesccassnccee sedenstaaverecdonddvnesanonesets 4 29 009 Budget Management iiiccs c cccasasuseadiveesccees ssceaastlessdecestsoanensessects 4 3 010 Charge Margin Rate ss sisvaccasasescsccessacceensceeedeadvavaccesadeneensoaveess 4 32 AS System Programming ssesssecssocesooessoecssccssocesocesoosssoesssccesocesocssoosesse 4 33 100 Flexible IN vin Dering ay2 0 6 55cs3 say s occa seasienavecauees cadeacastecsonsseaanes 4 33 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode oe eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 4 36 12 Available for KX TD1232 only Contents 4 4 4 5 102 Day Night Service Starting Time eeeeeeeeeeneeeneeee 4 37 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 006 4 39 106 Station Hunting Type ceiiclsagiceeseaitscacaencsgactaueanesetedateidectantens 4 40 107 System PassWord csin int e ages aa s 4 41 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button eeeeeeteeeteee 4 42 109 Expansion Card Unit Type oo cee ceeeeceeceecsseeeceeeeeenteeeenaees 4 43 113 VM Sta
101. 2 Gone Home 3 At Ext extension number 4 Back at hour minute 5 Out Until month day 6 In a Meeting e An extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed every time the user goes off hook Programming References Section 4 System Programming 008 Absent Messages 100 Flexible Numbering Absent message set cancel Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Absent Message Capability Account Code Entry Description An Account Code is used to identify incoming and outgoing outside calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR call record For incoming outside calls account codes are optional For outgoing outside calls there are three modes available to enter an account code Verified All Calls mode Verified Toll Restriction Override mode and Option mode One mode is selected for each extension on a Class of Service basis In Verified All Calls mode the user must always enter a pre assigned account code when making any of the following calls 3 2 Features 3 Features A Conditions unless it has previously been stored in memory e Call Forwarding to CO Line e Last Number Redial e Line Access e One Touch Dialing e Pickup Dialing e Saved Number Redial e Station Speed Dialing e System Speed Dialing In Verified Toll Res
102. 22 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Selection e Time schedule A B C D e CO line group number 1 through 8 e Modification table number 1 through 8 Default All time schedules Not stored Programming 1 Enter a program address 322 through 329 Display example ARS Route PL 1 2 Press NEXT to program time schedule A To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed Display example A G M G M G M 3 Enter a CO line group number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new number 4 Press m to enter the paired modification table number 5 Enter a modification table number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry enter the new modification table number 6 Press to enter the next priority CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to enter other CO line group numbers and modification table numbers 8 Press STORE 9 To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 11 Press END System Programming 4 77 322 329 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 conta Conditions e Up to three CO line groups and modification plans can be assigned for each time schedule A CO line group number and a modification table number must be ent
103. 24 Call Forwarding Follow Me sessessesseseesrserrerersersrerreesrrsrrrrresrrsseee 3 24 Call Forwarding No AnSWer sesssessessssesrssssstssssssesseessresresesssessoese 3 25 Call Porwardine to CO LANG it secceasccsdadcecesvederresdadahevestensecvenctennlenes 3 26 Call Td An enee R E E E E S 3 27 Call Hold DIS I eere r EEEE 3 28 Call Hold Exclusive CO Line wie cece cccccsseeseseececscessseeeseeesesees 3 28 Call Hold Exclusive Intercom 0 ccccecececccccccsssesessececcceseseeseeeeeesees 3 29 Call Mold retrieve CO Lane siiente 3 29 Call Hold etre Ve TiC OM in eenst 3 30 8 Available for KX TD1232 only Available for KX TD816 only Contents Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR eseese 3 30 Call Park wastes Si ace cael S e Se Aa ue Saale aes ears ceed 3 31 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 3 31 Call Pickup CO Asie ce cesses erie topes nian Geanenydahaysewenegnadeo tos ues e aa ES 3 32 Call Pickup Directed 2 5 2ipig tet oclcstetie st pae led ndlasp latina dates 3 33 LD Pickup Group teu ieren ai veoh wae eso toate dais 3 33 Call Pickup Deny cate t needa EE ioe ead caveat 3 34 Call S plein g s sinn deeds atlivecdeysnsdnn onde o3 gaat puted E RES 3 34 CALL TRANSFER FEATURES SUMMARY ecccessesseeeteeees 3 35 Call Transfer Screened to CO Line ceceececccccccesseseeeeceeees 3 35 Call Transfer Screened to Extension cccccsessseseseesesesssesns
104. 3 Slide the metal plates in the directions of the arrows and drive the screws 4 Place the templet on the wall to mark two screw positions and install the big screws into the wall 5 Hook the battery adaptor on the screw heads Notes If the Power LED does not go on check the main unit battery adaptor batteries and wiring connection e After connection of the battery adaptor keep the power switch on unless when the main unit is turned off Batteries will discharge e To charge the discharged batteries use a proper charging unit e Power Fuse 8A 32V 2 If the Power LED light goes off during a power failure the power fuse may have been blown To change the fuse 1 Turn the power switch off 2 Turn the fuse holder in the direction of Fuse Holder Arrow 8 while pushing it in the direction of Arrow ii 3 Change the fuse Om 4 Turn the fuse holder in the direction of Arrow while pushing it in the direction of Arrow 5 Turn the power switch on e Back up Duration depends on the amp hour of the batteries used e g When using two 12 VDC batteries 20 amp hour maintenance free car batteries the power is maintained for about three hours Available for KX TD1232 only Installation 2 53 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection Power Failure Transfer connects a specific single line telephone to selected CO line in the event of system power failure Single line telephones connected
105. 36 Pay Tone A SSiOMMenl 23 on35 5 Antiocaceasas ageassetoontee a ian otecasitonee 4 107 i 4 7 COS Programming seessecesocesoocssocssscessocesocesoosessccsseessocesocessosesseessee 4 108 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night eee 4 108 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 0 0 0000 4 109 503 Call Transfer to CO Line ceceesceessssesesssssssseesssesreee 4 110 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line eee ccecesceeeesececsteeeesteeeenaees 4 111 507 Do Not Disturb Override ccc ccc ccceeeeseeeseesssesssessseessesesseee 4 112 508 Account Code Entry Mode eee eeeececesceeceteeeceeeeeeseeeenaees 4 113 4 8 Extension Programming scccscccsssccssssccssscccsssccssesscssscceseessess 4 114 600 EXtra Device Pott 0ccccceeeeeeesssesssesesssssssssssssssssessseseseeees 4 114 601 Class Of Servicenet este i aidia iiiki eda 4 115 602 Extension Group Assignment sseessseesseesseesseeeseeetssresseesse 4 117 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing BENEN ING E E EA E E 4 118 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day INAS e e Ea e a N 4 120 14 Available for KX TD1232 only Contents 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night 4 122 609 Voice Mail Access Codes cccccccsesssssssssssessssssssssssssssssseeees 4 124 610 ISDN DDI Number Extension Number Transformation 4 125 4 9 Resource PrograMMing
106. 499 It is possible to store one hundred 24 digit telephone numbers per system maximum Conditions e Overriding Toll Restriction for System Speed Dialing can be enabled or disabled by system programming For digital proprietary telephone users only e Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used in combination For single line telephone users only e If a stored feature number includes or LD single line telephones cannot use it Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering System speed dialing 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override for System Speed Dialing DPT Features SLT Features System Speed Dialing Features 3 115 S 3 Features System Working Report Description The Digital Super Hybrid System automatically records the system s working state A printer connected to the EIA RS 232C port can be used to print the recorded data System programming is required to print out the system working report Recorded contents are as follows 1 Date of record e The date and time when cleared e The date and time when printed out 2 Incoming calls e The number of incoming calls e The number of answered incoming calls e
107. 6 9 12 3 6 9 a m p m Table 2 gt Time As shown in Table 2 the least costly route varies with the time of day To select the least expensive line at a certain time split the day into three zones as follows 1 7 00 a m 1 00 p m 2 1 00 p m 6 00 p m 3 6 00 p m 7 00 a m To program the time zones above use the program 313 ARS Time Four time zones Time A Time B Time C Time D are provided here Example Program Address 313 ARS Time Table Time Zones Entry Time A 7 00 a m lt t Enter the starting time of Time B 1 00 p m each zone If a zone is Time C 6 00 pam not necessary select Time D Disable Disable Table 3 Enter the starting hour for each zone Step 4 Determine the priority of the CO line groups in each time zone The table below shows the carrier and CO line groups selected for each priority and time zone 3 Features A 7 00 Time A Time B 13 00 13 00 18 00 18 00 7 00 Time C Least Costly Carrier CO Line Group Priority 1 Carrier F Group 2 Carrier F Group 2 Carrier E Group 1 Next Less Costly Carrier CO Line Group Priority 2 Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3 Carrier F Group 2 Most Costly Carrier CO Line Group Priority 3 Carrier G Group 3 Carrier E Group 1 Carrier G Group 3 Table 4 To have the system use the priorities shown above use one of the
108. 60 This card supports two doorphones and two door openers The doorphone is an option KX T30865 OO0000 D L L ee ts d P Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 KX T30865 KX T30865 Door Door Opener 1 Opener 2 Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 Operate all the features as a backup power supply in the event of a power failure Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 Available for KX TD1232 only System Outline 1 7 Available for KX TD816 only 14 Options DSS Console KX T7240 Permits easy and quick access to stations and features The Busy Lamp Field shows the idle or busy state of each station DSS Console 5 designed for use with a digital proprietary telephone The system supports up to four DSS Consoles per system Paired Telephone DSS Console Digital Proprictary KX T7240 Telephone Pair Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Battery Adaptor KX A46 Supports the connection of two car batteries 12 VDC 2 for power backup in case of a power failure Battery Adaptor KX A46 oK 8
109. A X e paeten AA 3 Conditions e A VPS can be assigned as the destination of the following features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Routing No Answer In these functions the caller to the extension need not know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS Follow On ID function If a DIL 1 N call is transferred to the VPS by IRNA your system transmits the mailbox number of the lowest jack number of the receiving extensions Features 3 129 V 3 Features e A mailbox number is a respective extension number by default The mailbox number can be changed only if program 990 System Additional Information Field 18 is set to free Pressing the Voice Mail Transfer button and dialing the extension number allows the extension user to transfer to the corresponding mailbox In this case Follow On ID function is available The Voice Mail extension should be set to Data Line Security to achieve proper recording The KX TD816 has one Extension Cards and can have one 8 Station Line Unit The KX TD1232 has two Extension Cards and can have two 8 Station Line Units It is recommended that you do not connect more than two VM ports to each card or unit Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 4 4 8 Station Line Unit Connection Programmi
110. Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 125 V 3 Features Voice Mail Integration Description This system can accommodate Voice Processing System VPS equipment which offers the user a Voice Mail and an Automated Attendant Services If an extension user has set Call Forwarding destination to the VPS a calling party will be forwarded to the VPS and can leave a voice message in the mailbox of the extension When a call is transferred to the VPS by the Call Forwarding or Intercept Routing No Answer features the mailbox number is sent to the VPS automatically with DTMF signalling Follow On ID Up to eight extension jacks can be connected to VPS as extensions in the system System Explanation 1 Voice Mail Service 1 1 Call Forwarding to VM If an extension user sets Call Forwarding C FWD whose destination is the VPS an incoming call is forwarded to the VPS under the proper conditions The system sends to the VPS a mailbox number of the corresponding extension at that time Therefore the calling party can leave his her message in the mailbox of the desired extension without knowing the mailbox number Outside Call DIL 1 1 Syst Intercom gt Poren Call VPS C FWD Extension gt VM1 p gt VM2 j VM Hunting i i Chain y VMX f amp VM 3 3 126 Features 3 Features Outside Call DIL 1 1 System
111. Button Assignment Station Programming cccccceecceseeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment SAVE Button Section 3 Features Button Flexible Redial Automatic DPT Features Redial Saved Number Features 3 99 R 3 Features Remote Station Lock Control Description The operator is given the privilege of controlling Electronic Station Lockout on any station Conditions Remote Station Lock Control is superior to Electronic Station Lockout If Station Lockout has already been set by the extension user and Remote Station Lock is set by the operator cancelling the lock is only possible by the operator Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Electronic Station Lockout Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Remote Station Lock Control Reverse Circuit Description This feature can be used to detect a reversal of CO line polarity from Central Office when trying to make an outside call This is useful for determining the start and completion of CO line calls Conditions This feature needs system programmings for each CO line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 420 Reverse Circuit Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Ringing Delayed Description If Direct In Lines DIL 1 N is established a telephone set is originally set to ring instantly This se
112. Call is not made Are the leading seven digits found in a Call is routed via selected line Leading Digit Table No Obtains applicable Route Plan Table number from the Leading Digit Table Call is routed via an idle line l Determines the Route Plan Tab CO line group of the priority 1 in the le by the present time of the day i priority 1 Is there any line available in the CO line group of the Yes No Y group from the Obtains applicable Modification Table number for the CO line Y Is the CO line group of the priority 2 assigned in Route Plan Table Route Plan Table Is there any line available in the y Modifies the digits CO line group of the priority 2 No lls Is the CO line group of the priority Calls 3 assigned in Route Plan Table Yes y Is there any line available in the No CO line group of the priority 3 al Yes Sends busy tone Features 3 11 AB 3 Features Automatic Station Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a specified time period the user will be disconnected from the line after reorder tone is sent To get a line again the user must go back on hook and then off hook Conditions This function works in the following cases When
113. Callback Busy Camp On Features 3 5 A 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS Description Conditions Automatic Route Selection ARS is a system programmable feature that automatically selects the least expensive route available at the time an outgoing outside call is made Previous programming eliminates the necessity for the user to dial the access code of the least expensive carrier All the user has to do is to dial the feature number for ARS and the number The appropriate CO line group is selected and an appropriate access code is added before the number is outpulsed e Toll Restriction check is done before ARS is applied e ARS works according to the selected dialing plan Thus if the user dialed number is not found in the dialing plan Leading Digit Tables the dialed number is sent out with Local Access Automatic line access Code e ARS is not applied to a call made by specifying a CO line group In other words it is possible to make an outside call by assigning a CO line group directly ARS Override e This feature also applies to Call Forwarding to CO Line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access ARS 312 ARS Mode 313 ARS Time 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit 331 ARS Modify Added Number 3 6 Features 3 Features A
114. Connecting Door Openers 1 Loosen the screw to remove the cover 3 Insert the wires coming from the door openers into holes and tighten the screws cj A P aee A To door O i opener 2 R O SAI i i Ir 3 opener 1 2 Notes For wiring it is recommended to use UL 1015 AWG 22 twisted wire or the equivalent e The wire should be between 1 2 and 2 4 mm 3 64 and 3 32 inch in diameter including the coating ees y 2 Loosen the screws D 1 2 2 4 mm 3 64 3 32 inch ag eee e Set the door opener paired with the doorphone NDOUDRADRDD et Installation 2 45 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection 2 Connection for KX TD1232 Use 4 pin plugs included to connect doorphone or door opener A plug is able to connect up to two doorphones or door openers 4 conductor wiring is required 1 Insert required wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the way into the plug Door opener 2 or Doorphone 2 B Door opener 1 or Doorphone 1 2 Insert the plug into the connector in the main unit 3 Connect th
115. D Use 4 pin plugs included to connect CO lines There are four plugs to connect eight CO lines A single plug is able to connect two CO lines Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 2 Connection before connection 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the way into the plug 4 pin plug Jacks for Power Failure Transfer CO 7 CO 8 CO 5 CO 6 CO 3 CO 4 CO 1 CO2 oyojo o View of Connector BS J co2 Tse E EE o To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office For details refer to Section 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection Installation 2 33 2 4 2 CO Line Connection kx 101232 CO1 through CO8 4 ISDN S0 Line Connection with KX TD281 Use 4 pin plugs included to connect ISDN SO lines There are four plugs to connect four ISDN SO lines A single plug is able to connect one ISDN SO line Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 2 Connection before connection 1 Insert required telephone wires into the holes in a plug Fix the transparent part into the black part Note Do not strip the wires Insert the wires all the wa
116. EE 3 64 Floating Station 4 4 es oaro eGo iene ene Ae tae 3 67 Full Ome Toe aI an 0 ass vs anes csemcods ae gesuicageas dv ssaeadaaa souaete de seacodateaeeeewwa 3 67 Group Call Pickup Call Pickup Group eeeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeenees 3 33 Group CO G CO Button Button Group CO G CO 3 17 Handset Headset Selection seiysciestianse yun Acoed nee oie atonnle ee nie wiete 3 68 Handsfree Anis Wet baClasivadschithernadesiiok nani dibaaebeteeasue as utnes 3 69 Handsfree Operation ccaigee beaten vedas usw ena e 3 69 Hold Recall nsaisan naa a a aga 3 70 Host PBX ACCESS seinn nnen E AE E E RET 3 70 HOTEL APPLICATION coni a ie R E O a ah 3 71 Check In Check Out erir e E eE Ea ie 3 71 Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call ce eeseeeccesseceneeceseeceseceeeecneeeeneeeeee 3 72 Intercept Rotingo i a eer Regia eer E eee ee ae 3 73 Intercom Calling aeons at ce Be eee Geet Be te de dole 3 73 Last Number Redial Redial Last Number c cece eeeeeeee 3 98 LED Indication CO Line 0 0 0 0 cccccccccccecececececececececececececeeuseseeeeess 3 74 LED Indication Intercom ccccccccccccecccececececececececececececeseceseeeseeass 3 75 Limited Call DuratiOn jccisssesstsvcssdcassticesatscesedatasasid hssdataeassaaoseccess 3 76 Line Access AUtOMAatiC ccceeeccecccccccccessesesceccccceseeusssseeccesseseenenenss 3 77 Line Access CO Line GitOups ve ccsdaaseacdusessycsessauqengtiseceassaeeede aavecasagozes 3 78 EmeA
117. Enter 116 Display ROM Version 2 Press NEXT Display System NO gt 3 Enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 4 To confirm the other system press SELECT and enter the System Number The display shows the ROM version of the specified system 5 Press END e The out of service system number is unacceptable e For KX TD816 you can enter the system number 0 only Skip step 4 None 4 50 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 117 Charge Display Selection Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the initial display format of charge fee on a display telephone AS Pulse AS 1 Enter 117 Display Charge Meter 2 Press NEXT Display example AS 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END None Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference Display Call Information System Programming 4 5 LIS 4 3 System Programming Charge Verification Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns the extension which is allowed to refer or clear for the call information on the extension CO line account code and the total e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 all jacks e Enable Disable All jacks Enable 1
118. G TO REGULATIONS THE POWER SOCKET WALL OUTLET SHOULD BE LOCATED NEAR THIS EQUIPMENT AND BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE Attention The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the event of theft MODEL NO SERIAL NO For your future reference DATE OF PURCHASE NAME OF DEALER DEALER S ADDRESS Introduction This Installation Manual provides technical information for the Panasonic Digital Super Hybrid System KX TD816 KX TD1232 It is designed to serve as an overall technical reference for the system and includes a description of the system its hardware and software features and services and environmental requirements This manual contains the following sections Section 1 System Outline Provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications Section 2 Installation Contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units Section 3 Features Describes all the basic optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides information about the programming required condit
119. GM NO gt is displayed you can select one of the following e To go to program 000 press the NEXT button e To go to another program enter the program address Rotation of jack number Each jack of our Digital Super Hybrid System supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and an analog device with different extension numbers eXtra Device Port XDP function To program this function it is necessary to assign two parts for each jack The first part of jack one is 01 1 The second part of jack one is 01 2 The first part of jack two is 02 1 and so on The NEXT and PREV buttons can be used to move from jack to jack as required in programs 003 004 and 601 through 609 Example NEXT NEXT NEXT 01 1 ca HOLD HOD a OD as PREV PREV PREV Note The first part of a jack is fora DPT of a XDP assigned jack The second part is for a single line device Program 600 EXtra Device Port assigns which jacks are XDP Storing your data Press STORE to store your data e The STORE indicator lights red and confirmation tone sounds Confirmation tone one beep After pressing STORE you will hear a beep This informs you that your storage is completed Alarm tone three beeps If you hear the alarm check that your entry is valid Making another selection within the same program address To make the next higher selection press NEXT To make the previous selection press PREV e To make a specific sele
120. Incoming Set eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeteees 4 86 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night eects 4 88 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night eee 4 89 411 Host PBX Access Codes 0 cccccccesssscceccceeeessnsseceseeeeeesensaaees 4 90 FAD i Pauses Pine cose hee EN EEEE EIEEE ied 4 92 413 Register Recall Signal Time 5 42 45 d552 ssegecsdsas cansacsscede stsoecsensates 4 93 414 Disconnect TiM einstriid n esia 4 94 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set sssssssesesseeesseesseesseessee 4 95 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment s sssseesseeeeseeeesseessersseessee 4 97 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment cece eee 4 98 418 ISDN DDI Service Assignment ccc eeecceceereeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 4 99 419 CO Line Name Assignment 0 0 0 0 eeseceeceeceeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesaes 4 100 420 Reverse Circuit Assignment ssssesssessessseeesseeesseesseesseessee 4 101 430 DID Table Number Assignment eeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 102 431 DID Incoming Assignment 0 00 0 e ce eeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceteeeceteeeesaes 4 103 432 DID Outgoing Assignment cee eeeeeceereeceeeeeceeeeeesteeeesaes 4 104 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed Digit and RECEIVER Digit deseri ngestoe te ES EES ENEE EESE 4 105 434 DID Added Numbet ccccccccccccsesessssssssssssssssssssssssessessesees 4 106 435 DID Wink Time Assignment esssessesssesssesessseessresseesseeesees 4 107 4
121. Installation 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 7 Continued KX TD185 Jack for Power Failure Transfer at T1 R1 T2 R2 CO 5 CO6 or CO 9 CO10 J C07 CO8 tq or Q amp C011 CO12 IN T2 R1 T1 R2 M KN hig NW t To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office R Ring T Tip View of TEL Jack CO 2 D Ge For details refer to Section 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection KX TD280 N NJL i NY t i TB TA ISDN Id RA Port No 1 or 5 i ae RB Ts Ne M WS Jali ISDN Port No 2 or 6 QO u gt To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office Installation 2 41 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 8 10 11 Tie all of the cords into a bundle If other cords are exposed in the upper cabinets tie them also Close the cabinet cover and secure the outside screw Cover the cords with the cord holder included D1232 z l j leg emeat holder Fix the cords to the wall as shown so that the front cover can be o
122. Intercept Extension Day Night 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time 413 Register Recall Signal Time 414 Disconnect Time Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 43 C Conference Description Conditions 3 Features The system supports three party conference calls including outside or inside parties During a two party conversation the extension user can add a third party to their conversation thereby establishing a conference Possible conference combinations are 1 inside and 2 outside 2 inside and outside and 3 inside e Up to six conference calls are allowed simultaneously e When a two party call is changed to a three party call and vice versa a confirmation tone is sent to all three parties Eliminating the tone is programmable e The third party must have a CO button which is common to the CO line in use by the original parties Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 13 Station Programming 0 cceccccecceeeeneeeteeeeenteeeseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Conference CONF Button Section 3 Features Conference Unattended DPT Features SLT Features Conference Conference Unattended Description Conditions When a propr
123. M PM Time A 8 00 AM Time B 5 00 PM Time C 9 00 PM Time D Disable 1 Enter 313 Display ARS Time 2 Press NEXT to program Time A Display example Time A 8 00 AM To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 3 Enter the hour To set no schedule Disable press SELECT and go to step 6 If Disable is selected pressing SELECT shows the previous stored hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 4 Press m gt to select AM PM 5 Press SELECT for AM or PM 6 Press STORE 7 To program another time schedule keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired time schedule is displayed 8 Repeat steps 3 through 7 9 Press END e The times must be programmed in sequence from Time A to Time D Enter a starting time for each time schedule Select Disable for an unnecessary schedule e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 75 314 321 4 5 TRS ARS Programming ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans I through 8 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References By entering numbers into each leading digit plan programs below you are starting the process to determine which CO line group will be used to route the call Program 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 Plan 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
124. N SO Line 2 6 12 8 Station Line Unit 1 2 4 Extension Jack 16 32 64 Station Terminal 32 64 128 including DSS Consoles DSS Console 4 4 Remote Card Doorphone Door Opener External Pager FP N N NN YN het A BR BR BR WY c gt External Music Source System Outline 1 11 1 5 3 System Capacity System Data Item Max Quantity Operator 2 System Speed Dialing 500 One Touch Dialing 24 per station proprietary telephone Station Speed Dialing 10 per station Call Park 10 Absent Message 9 CO Line Group Toll Restriction Level 8 Extension Group 16 Class of Service 8 Message Waiting 128 1 12 System Outline Section 2 Installation This section contains the basic system installation and wiring instructions as well as how to install the optional cards and units 2 1 Before Installation Please read the following notes concerning installation and connection before installing the system Safety Installation Instructions When installing telephone wiring basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 2 3 4 Installation Precautions This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only Avoid installing in the following places Doing so may result in malfunction noise or discoloration Wiring Precautions 1 2 3 Dusty places or places where water or oil may come into Never install tel
125. NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Immediately after changing your assignment changed setting may not work for a maximum of eight seconds Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP 4 114 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 601 Description Selection Default Programming Class of Service Programs each extension for a Class of Service COS The COS determines the call handling abilities of each extension For Check In Check Out feature a primary and secondary COS number can be assigned per extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e COS number 1 through 8 All jacks 1 2 Primary Secondary COS 1 COS 1 1 Enter 601 Display COS Assign 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack
126. Night Mode Day Night mode can be switched either automatically at a pre assigned time or manually by the operator at any time desired Automatic Night Service If you select automatic switching mode your system will switch the Day Night mode at the programmed time each day The starting time of the Day Night mode can be set for each day Manual Night Service If you select manual switching mode the operator can switch the Day Night mode by dialing the feature number 3 86 Features 3 Features O Conditions The following programming items may be assigned in a different way between day mode and night mode 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Night service mode set cancel 101 Day Night Service Switching Mode 102 Day Night Service Starting Time None DPT Features SLT Features Night Service Operator Service Features Night Service On Off Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA Description Conditions OHCA allows you to inform a busy extension that another call is w
127. None Operation References Not applicable Display Self Extension Number Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to display their own jack number and extension number in station programming mode Conditions Display example If the jack number is 02 and the extension number is 202 Jack02 lt gt EXT202 Programming References Station Programming cceccceeceseeeeeeneeeeceteeeaeees User Manual Self Extension Number Confirmation Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Features 3 55 D 3 Features Display Time and Date Description Offers the display proprietary telephone user a display of either the present time and the date or the date and the day of the week It is displayed while on hook Conditions e There are two types of display Display example 1 Month Day Time 1 Jan 12 00AM Display example 2 Month Day Year Day of the Week 1 Jan 1994 SAT e The present date and time are set by system programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 000 Date and Time Set Feature References None Operation References Appendix User Manual Display Examples Display Contrast Adjustment Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to adjust the display contrast Conditions Soft buttons and Volume button are used to sharpen the contrast to one of three levels Programming References Configuration 00 0cccccccccccecccs
128. O Button Assignment Station Programming 0 0 ccecceecceeeeneeeteeeteenteeneeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment None Operation References Refer to respective operating instructions User Manual Features 3 21 C 3 Features CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Call forwarding features enable you to have your calls forwarded to a specified destination You may specify the circumstances under which your calls are forwarded The following Call Forwarding features are available Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding Busy Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Forwarding All Calls Description This feature is used when you want all your calls to be automatically re directed to another extension Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Outside calls DIL 1 1 Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to an extension which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting can be activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Huntin
129. OHCA function the caller can announce the call through the speaker Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required Section 3 Features Call Waiting Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA DPT Features SLT Features Busy Station Signaling BSS Button Direct Station Selection DSS Description Conditions DSS button permits the proprietary telephone user one touch access to other extension users e A flexible CO button on a proprietary telephone can be assigned as a DSS button using either system or station programming e DSS buttons are provided on DSS Console with default setting Changing the setting is possible from the paired telephone using station programming e Once a button is assigned as a DSS button it provides Busy Lamp Field BLF status e The mode of a DSS button on a DSS Console proprietary telephone can be programmed to disconnect the CO line and calls the extension or hold and transfer the call to the extension One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 108 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Station Programming ccceceecceseeeeeeteeeeeeteeeaeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field One Touch Transfer by DSS DSS Console KX T7240 Button
130. Off Idle Green On I use Green slow flash I hold Green moderate flash I Exclusive Hold CO to CO call Unattended Conference Green rapid flash Hold Recall Incoming call Red On Other use Red slow flash Other hold 3 74 Features 3 Features Flashing light winks patterns Slow flash Moderate flash Rapid flash Conditions L J 7 n Red slow flash indication appears on the S CO button only Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming ccceecceecceseeereeeteeeeceteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO Button Single CO S CO Button Loop CO L CO Operation References Not applicable LED Indication Intercom Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicator of the INTERCOM button indicates the line condition with a variety of lighting patterns This allows the user to see the current state of the intercom line The table on the next page shows the lighting patterns and the intercom line conditions Features 3 75 L 3 Features INTERCOM Button Intercom Status Off Idle Green on Intercom call Conference established Gre
131. PS to another AA port 1 allow Integration 25 Prevents or allows sending pulse dialing signals 0 prevent 0 None during an outside call 1 allow System Programming 4 14 990 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information conta Field Description Selection Default References 26 Selects the extension hooking signal 0 32 1000 ms 1 None detection time 1 32 136 ms 27 Enables or disables the Digital Test Access 0 enable 1 None 1 disable 30 Assigns whether the system disconnects the 0 disconnect 1 None CO line or not if nothing is dialed after 1 do not seizing a CO line disconnect Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References e Area code 01through 12 06 through 12 are reserved e Selection See Selection shown above for each area See Default shown above 1 9 10 None Enter 990 Display System Add Inf Press NEXT Display Area NO gt Enter an area code 01 through 05 Display example 0010100011000001 Keep pressing m or lt to move the cursor to the desired field Enter your selection 0 or 1 To change the current entry press STORE and the new selection To program another field repeat steps 4 and 5 Press STORE To program another area press SELECT and the desired area code Repeat steps 4 through 8 Press END See References shown a
132. Presentation feature A maximum of 15 calls are recorded per telephone e The call log is registered at the time the DPT finishes ringing If a call is directed to multiple DPTs the call log is registered at the DPT that has the smallest jack number of the ringing DPTs Transferred call information is also recorded If the DPT is in Call Forwarding No Answer or IRNA is activated the call log is registered at the original DPT but not at the destination DPT unless the destination party answers the call and record it manually The telephone user can control the CO Incoming Call Information Log Mode on the unit when the information area is full If the user sets this mode new CO incoming call information is retained but old data is discarded If the user cancels this mode new CO incoming call information is not memorized on the unit To set or cancel the mode a corresponding feature number is used The telephone user can lock the display of the unit so that CO incoming call information is not shown on the display if the user does not want others to see the information A lock code is required to set or cancel this feature Operator can cancel the lock in case the user forgets the lock code Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 7 2 ISDN SO Line Unit Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name
133. RK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 600msec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You may disable EFA if not required The Recall feature will be in effect in place of EFA Program 414 Disconnect Time is used to select the time required for the Recall feature e The register recall signal time required is determined by the central office or the host PBX lines e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features External Feature Access Recall System Programming 4 93 414 4 6 CO Line Programming Disconnect Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Determines the amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 all CO line groups Time seconds 0 5 2 0 4 0 All CO line groups 2 0 s 1 Enter 414 Display TRG Discnct Time 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Ente
134. Redial Repeated Times 1 30 times Call Forwarding No Answer Time Out 1 12 rings CO Dial Starting Time n 100 ms n 0 40 CO to CO Duration Time 1 64 min Extension to CO Call Duration Time 1 64 min Hold Recall Time 0 240 s Intercept Routing Time Out 3 48 rings Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 0 64 min Pickup Dialing Waiting Time 1 5s SMDR Duration Count Starting Time 0 60s Toll Restriction First Digit Time Out 5 120 s Toll Restriction Inter digit Time Out 5 30s Transfer Recall Time 3 48 rings CO Line Group Timer Items Disconnect Time 0 5 2 0 4 0s Register Recall Signal Time Disable 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 ms Pause Time 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5s CO Line Timer Items CPC Signal Detection Time n ms n 02 75 Incoming DTMF Digit Time 80 160 ms Features 3 117 3 Features Extension Timer Items Delayed Ringing Count Disable Immediate 4 6 8 rings No ring Voice Mail Integration Timer Items DTMF Signal Duration 80 160 ms DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s after VPS Answer DTMF Signal Waiting Time 0 5 1 0 1 5 2 0s after VPS calls Extension Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 212 213 404 405 412 413 414 603 990 jouer Ea ea ie ee es a ar Feature References None Hold Recall Time Transf
135. SD TXD 2 fF 3 RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 2 SD TXD BA CB CS CTS 5 CC DR DSR 6 20 ER DTR CD AB SG 7 7 SG AB CD ER DTR 20 m 5 CS CTS CB 6 DR DSR CC 8 CD DCD CF Printer IBM Personal Computer 9 pin Connection Chart If you connect an IBM PC or printer with 9 pin EIA RS 232C connector to your system see the chart below EIA RS 232C port on the main unit EIA RS 232C port on the printer IBM PC Note unit to the printer cable fe Signal Pin Pin Signal ned EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 BA SD TXD 2 gt RD RXD BB BB RD RXD 3 7 SD TXD BA CA RS RTS 4 ER DTR CD CB CS CTS 5 SG AB CC DR DSR 6 DR DSR CC AB SG 7 RS RTS CA CD ER DTR 20 CS CTS CB 25 pin 9 pin Please read your printer manual and connect the first EIA pin FG of this Installation 2 3 8 Printer Connection EIA RS 232C Signals Frame Ground FG Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground conductor of the AC power cord Transmitted Data SD TXD ic ccc eceeceseeseeeees output Conveys signals from the unit to the printer A Mark condition is held unless data or break signals are being transmitted Received Data RD RXD 0 ccc cece eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee es input Conveys signals from the printer Request to Send RS RTS
136. Set 100 Flexible Numbering CO incoming call information log mode CO incoming call information log lock 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment 419 CO Line Name Assignment 3 41 Features Features 3 41 C 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR CO Incoming Call Information Display Operation Reference DPT Features User Manual CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock CO Incoming Call Information Log Mode Operator Service Features CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock Clear CO Line Connection Assignment Description This allows you to specify the CO lines connected to your system to prevent an extension user from originating an outside call by selecting a line which is not connected An idle line is selected from the connected ones when an extension user makes an Automatic Line Access Conditions If the user tries to make a call with a disconnected line reorder tone sounds to indicate that the line is out of use Programming References Section 4 System Programming 400 CO Line Connection Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Description Allows you to assign the CO line an extension user can use for outgoing calls This feature is useful to prevent unauthorized toll calls Conditions e When an extension user tries to make an outside
137. T AUTO DIAL STORE STORE HOLD END Location of Controls with the Overlay The pictures below show the functions of the buttons of the KX T7230 and KX T7235 while in programming mode C Co co PROGRAMS oft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT c PROGRA SHIFT me Vc it me me j Soft 1 Soft2 Soft 3 i J i Jj i i JC tla C JC J C E JaA Iq L i J a a 1a aa a 1a C J C 1 AG C ad Ja 1a J GI O 1a ECRET PAUSE CLEAR SECRET gt PAUSE CLEAR SECRET 4 a AE l D D BD C D J 1 2 3 1 2 3 A WoLUME voLuMe 4 5 6 y 4 5 6 x STORE STORE 7 8 9 amp 7 8 9 E SELECT SELECT 0 B 0 B PREV FLASH END NEXT PREV FLASH END NEXT t Ww o o E System Programming 4 5 4 1 1 Using the Digital Proprietary Telephone Viewing the Display The display gives you helpful information such as what you should do now what you have done etc The KX T7230 and the KX T7235 both utilize two information lines for programming The upper line is called the Message Line and the lower one is called the Function L
138. TION Operation References Not applicable Busy Lamp Field Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the DSS Direct Station Selection buttons each of which corresponds to a selected extension tell whether the corresponding extensions are idle or busy Conditions e This function is available for DSS buttons on DSS Consoles and for flexible CO buttons assigned as DSS buttons on digital proprietary telephones DPT e A DSS button indicator lights red if the corresponding extension is busy Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming cceccceecceseeeseeteeeeceeenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Direct Station Selection DSS Button Feature References Section 3 Features Button Direct Station DSS Console KX T7240 Selection DSS Operation References Not applicable Busy Station Signaling BSS Description When attempting to call a busy extension Busy Station Signaling allows you to signal the user on the phone to answer your call The called extension user hears a Call Waiting tone and is able to answer the call 3 14 Features 3 Features B Conditions e This feature is effective if the called extension has enabled Call Waiting If Call Waiting is enabled the caller will hear ringback tone if not the caller will hear reorder tone e If the called party is provided with Off Hook Call Announcement
139. These eight plans are used to analyze the number which the user dials and to decide the route plan for the call If the user dialed number is registered in plan 1 then Routing Plan 1 is selected for the call ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 match ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 programs 322 through 329 respectively e Location number 01 through 50 e Leading digit number 7 digits max All locations Not stored 1 Enter a program address 314 through 321 Display example ARS Leading PL 1 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 Not Stored 4 Enter a leading digit number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END There is a maximum of 50 leading digit numbers for each plan Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 76 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 3227 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 Description Assigns the CO line group and modification plan to be used for each route plan and time schedule Program 3
140. Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of milliseconds the system waits before dialing after a CO line is seized Time milliseconds 0 through 40 100 is the actual time 0 ms 1 Enter 211 Display CO Dial Start pA Press NEXT Display example Time 000 msec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e You enter a number from 0 through 40 The actual time is a 100 times your input e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Direct Line Access Individual System Programming 4 67 212 4 4 Timer Programming Call Duration Count Start Time Description Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and this timer expires the system starts counting the call A display telephone shows the elapsed time of the call The starting time and the duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record Selection Time seconds 0 through 60 Default Os Programming 1 Enter 212 Display SMDR Durat Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 0 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Pres
141. Time Set contd 10 Press STORE 11 Press NEXT Display example 12 00 AM 12 Enter the hour To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new hour 13 Press m 14 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 15 Press m 16 Press SELECT for AM or PM 17 Press STORE 18 Press END e After changing an entry you can press STORE You do not have to perform all of the rest of the steps To go back to the previous field press lt at steps 4 through 9 and steps 13 through 16 If you hear the alarm after pressing STORE check that the date is valid The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Display Time and Date 4 16 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Description Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers from 000 through 499 Selection e Speed dial number 000 through 499 Telephone number 24 digits max Default All speed dial numbers Not stored Programming 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To chang
142. ady entered programming mode and that you will use Method 2 Confirming the entries You may review the stored programming without making any changes Going back to the operation mode Two ways are available to go back to the operation mode 1 Lift the handset while in programming mode 2 When the Initial Message SYS PGM NO gt is displayed press the PROGRAM button To display the Initial Message press END 4 8 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters You can enter characters to store names for speed dial numbers extension numbers etc by using the dialing key pad and the buttons Each of twelve dialing keys on the dialing key pad has seven characters assigned See the Combination Tables below Pressing SELECT Times B ln als a S H vw zi al ul oO anasan wl Rl t R ll alale vlivy g XIOS Z Al Lo wN KiIi lt ial olni ma lt K oO oo AJ aA MP A wD n Combination Table 2 Combination Table 1 Press SHIFT to alternate between capital and small letters System Programming 4 9 4 1 3 Entering Characters To select a desired character press the key which has For example to select the letter M Select either of the following two methods 1 2 Example of entering characters Using the SHIFT and Soft but
143. aiting by talking through the built in speaker of the called party s proprietary telephone If the existing call is using the handset the second conversation is made with the speakerphone so that the called party can talk to two parties independently OHCA is performed the same way as Busy Station Signaling BSS It depends on the telephone type used by the called party whether BSS or OHCA is activated by the operation If the called telephone is one of the following OHCA becomes active KX T7235 This feature is only effective if the called extension has set the Call Waiting If this is not set the caller will hear reorder tone Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting set cancel Features 3 87 Features Os Fams Feature References Section 3 Features Call Waiting Operation References DPT Features User Manual Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA One Touch Dialing Description One Touch Dialing offers the digital proprietary telephone DPT user one touch access to a desired party or system feature This is enabled by storing an extension number a telephone number or a feature number of up to 16 digits on a One Touch Dialing button The number of buttons available depends on the type of DPT One Touch Dialing buttons can be programmed to flexible buttons CO DSS or PF Programmable Feature Conditions e It is possible to store an account code into a One Touch Di
144. ake a Conference call or make Call Splitting The held call can be retrieved from other extensions Conditions e With a digital proprietary telephone Consultation Hold is established by pressing TRANSFER or CONF button With a single line telephone it is established by pressing the Register Recall button e With a single line telephone the user can hold a call only to transfer it e Doorphone calls and paging calls cannot be placed on Consultation Hold 3 46 Features 3 Features D e A new incoming call will not arise at the extension which is keeping a call on Consultation Hold The extension is regarded as busy e If a calling party is placed on hold music is sent to the party if available Music on Hold e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Transfer Recall starts e If an outside call is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Programming References Feature References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 2 5 Section 3 Features Call Splitting Call Transfer Unscreened Call Transfer Screened to Conference CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to Music on Hold Extension Not applicable Data Line Security Description Conditions Data Line Security is a function that can be set on individual extensions Once set com
145. al computer Stop bit A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of your printer or personal computer Selection e New line code CR LF CR CR Carriage Return LF Line Feed e Baud rate baud 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 e Word length bits 7 8 e Parity bit None Mark Space Even Odd e Stop bit length bits 1 2 Default New line code CR LF Baud rate 9600 Word length 8 Parity bit Mark Stop bit 1 Port 1 Port 2 Programming 1 Enter a program address 806 for Port 1 or 807 for Port 2 Display example RS232C Paramet 1 2 Press NEXT to program new line code Display example NL Code CR LF 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program baud rate Display example Baud Rate 9600 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 132 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 806 807 EIA RS 232C Parameters Port 1 Port 2 conta Conditions Feature References 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Press STORE Press NEXT to program word length Display example Word Lengt 8bits Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press NEXT to program parity bit Display example Parity Mark Keep pressing SELECT until the desired select
146. aling button e Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing manual dialing Last Number Redial and Saved Number Redial can be used together e It is possible to store a number consisting of 17 digits or more by dividing it and storing it in two One Touch Dialing buttons In this case a line access code should not be stored on the second button e If the Full One Touch Dialing is enabled there is no need to go off hook before pressing the One Touch Dialing button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming 0 cccceeeeeeee EREA User Manual Flexible Button Assignment One Touch Dialing Button Full One Touch Dialing Assignment DSS Console Features ccceceeeceeeeeeee seat User Manual Station Programming One Touch Dialing Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Full One Touch Dialing Operation References DPT Features User Manual One Touch Dialing DSS Console Features One Touch Dialing One Touch Access for System Features 3 88 Features 3 Features O One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Conditions This feature if programmed allows the DSS Console and the digital proprietary telephone user to hold an outside call and quickly transfer it to an extension While talking to an outside party pressing a DSS button on the console or the proprietary telephone provides automatic hold and transfer
147. all Hold Exclusive CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held outside call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results After Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension e If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Section 4 System Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 3 28 Features 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features Hold Recall Music on Hold DPT Features Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Exclusive Intercom Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to prevent any other extension users from retrieving a held intercom call Only the user who held it can retrieve the call e Only one intercom call can be placed on Call Hold or Exclusive Call Hold at a time e If a call on hold is not retrieved in a specific period of time Hold Recall results After Hold Recall results the held call can be retrieved from any other extension e Music is sent to the party on hold if available Music on Hold Programming References Feature References Operation References
148. alled in KX TD1232 It allows programming and maintenance of the system from a remote location 7 ji i Vhs cms _ rT _ VT Central Office A i ER Personal Computer with modem Telephone Line Programming References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Feature References Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 2 6 Installation Available for KX TD1232 only 2 2 4 Wall Mounting This set is exclusively made for wall mounting only The wall where the main unit is to be mounted must be able to support the weight of the main unit If screws other than the ones supplied are used use the same sized diameter screws as the enclosed ones KX TD816 Mounting on Wooden Wall Mounting on Concrete or Mortar Wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall 1 Place the templet included on the wall to mark the three screw positions to mark the three screw positions 2 Drill three holes and drive the anchor plugs included with a hammer flush to the wall To the wall surface Anchor Plug E ye 1 4 inch 29 mm 1 1 8 inch 2 Install the three screws included into the wall 3 Install the three screws included into the anchor plugs Drive the
149. am 001 and if a match is found decides the caller s name by using the System Speed Dialling Names stored in program 002 The display of CO line name has the precedence on the operator s telephone The display DPT KX T7230 or KX T7235 user can record the information of the call received by CLIP feature CO Incoming Call Information Log feature Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 7 2 ISDN SO Line Unit Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment 419 CO Line Name Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR CO Incoming Call Information Log Operation Reference DPT Features User Manual CO Incoming Call Information Display 3 40 Features 3 Features C Co Incoming Call Information Log Description Conditions Connection References If the display digital proprietary telephone KX T7230 or KX T7235 user cannot answer a call the telephone automatically records the caller s telephone number name and the time The user can call back the caller by checking the call log This is available if such a telephone receives incoming outside calls from the ISDN SO line provided with the CLIP Calling Line Identification
150. amming Dial this number from the PC Remote Programming You can perform system programming and maintenance from a remote site using a PC Remote Card is required already installed in the main unit Assign the floating number of the modem in system programming Starting system administration from a remote location can be done in the following ways e Call an extension probably the operator from a remote location and request a transfer to the modem e Assign the modem as the destination of the DIL 1 1 feature e A digital proprietary telephone can be used to perform system programming e Only one access is allowed to system programming at any one time e To access system administration a valid password must be entered The password is factory programmed and can be changed Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 113 S 3 Features e System administration can be performed on line except for the procedures of diagnosis If the system goes off line the system functions as if it was in power failure Refer to Power Failure Transfer feature Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 107 System Password 813 Floating Number Assignment 814 Modem Standard Section 3 Features System Programming with Station Message Detail Digital Proprietary Telephone Recording SMDR Operation References Not applicable System Programming with Digital Proprietary Telephone Description
151. an outside call A display example CO03 AB COMPANY Charge Meter This is shown during an established call A display example 201 00005 Charge Fee This is shown during an established call A display example CO01 00001 15 Call duration This is shown during an established outside call The display remains for five seconds after the call is finished A display example CO 02 0 02 28 Conditions e Extension numbers and names and CO line names are programmable If no name is stored only the number is displayed e The display shows no intercom call duration e The outgoing outside call duration starts when the programmable timer expires Features 3 53 D 3 Features e It is programmable to select the first display meter or charge by System Programming To alternate the display press the CO button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 117 Charge Display Selection 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 419 CO Line Name Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display Operation References Not applicable Display Extension Programmed Data Description Allows the display proprietary telephone user to confirm the features assigned on the buttons on the telephone When it is on hook that is when the handset is on the cradle and the SP PHONE button is off pressing a button displays the use of the button or the
152. and from the external paging devices external pagers If one of the paged persons answers your paging you can talk to the person through the connected line e If System Connection is established paging is performed to all digital proprietary telephones and all external paging devices in both systems e The confirmation tone is sent to extensions when the paging is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable e The confirmation tone is sent from external pagers before the voice announcement Eliminating the tone is programmable e The ringing or busy extension cannot receive a page Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Pager Connection Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external Paging external answer TAFAS answer Paging group Paging group answer 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 91 P 3 Features Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Paging All Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer Paging External Description Allows you to make a voice announcement using external paging devices external pagers One pager for KX TD816 and up to two pagers for KX TD1232 can be contained For KX TD1232 it is possible to select one or two pagers to perform your paging Any telephone user
153. any display digital proprietary telephone user in the system can set the following programs 000 Date and Time Set 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set a a Password 4 through 7 digits 1234 1 Enter 120 Display User Password 2 Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e The password can be from four to seven digits long The valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty None 4 54 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 121 Hotel Application Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature Reference Assigns whether the hotel application is enabled or disabled Disable Enable Disable 1 4 5 Enter 121 Display Hotel Apply Asn Press NEXT Display example Hotel Disable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END If Enable is selected the menu Hotel is displayed on the operator extension s KX T7235 and the Check In Check Out feature is available Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION System Programming 4 55 200 4 4 Timer Programming Hold Recall Time Descriptio
154. are recommended 1 Install the extension wire underground 2 Use a conduit to protect the wire Main Building Protectors CO Another Building ins i CO l a Main EXTN PT Distribution Petes Unit Frame EXTN Lightning Protector EXTN EXTN TEL TEL Earth Note The lightning protector for an extension is different from that for CO 2 36 Installation 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Earth Rod Installation Diagram The length of earth rod and the required depth depend on the composition of the soil Consider the following recommendations Lightning Protector CO Earth Wire Main Unit Pa a en Underground HY ra P 4 e P Pa fe vd Kf ae Cg E A Fe Vo Se Pa 4 Pa A r tp F L A C ae ae ae goa Koa LSS we 1 Installation location of the earth rod 2 Check oObstructions cccccccccececeeeeeenseeeees None 3 Composition of the earth rod uo ee Metal 4 Depth of the earth rod jei5 5 cce teen ecncaiia lt 5 Size of the earth Wire cece cece eeeeeeee than 1 6 mm Installation 2 37 2 4 Optional Cards and Units Installation 2 4 4 8 Station Line Unit Connection To add eight extensions KX TD816 jacks 9 through 16 KX TD1232 jacks 17 through 24 use the optional 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 To add 16
155. artment numbers should be stored in program 311 Emergency Dial Set so that they are excepted from toll restriction If a stored Host PBX access code is found in the dialed number a toll restriction check starts for succeeding telephone number Toll restriction for System Speed Dialing can be cancelled for the whole system It is programmable whether the X or the user dials is to be checked or not on the Toll Restriction code This is useful to prevent unauthorized calls which could be possible through certain Central Offices exchange system It is programmable to admit the press of the RECALL button during an outside call on the extensions in levels 7 and 8 Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 207 First Digit Time 208 Inter Digit Time 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 601 Class of Service 990 System Additional Information Field 14 Section 3 Features Toll Restriction Override by Toll Restriction Override for Account Code Entry System Speed Dialing Operation References Not applicable 3 122 Features 3 Features T Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Description Allows the extension user to override toll restriction temporarily to make a toll call from a toll r
156. ault References 1 Sound source during transfer 0 ringback tone 1 e CALL 1 Music on Hold TRANSFER FEATURES e Music on Hold 2 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation and then placing down the handset during a Hold Hold CO line call single line telephones only 1 disconnection 3 Result of pressing the RECALL button on 0 disconnection 1 e External proprietary telephones during a CO line signal Feature Access call 1 register recall e Recall signal 4 Enables or disables the dial tone between 0 disable 1 None obtaining a CO line and dialing the phone 1 enable number when using the one touch dial redial or speed dial function 5 Result of pressing the hookswitch lightly 0 Consultation 0 Consultation single line telephones only Hold Hold 1 disconnection 6 Sets the duration of the DTMF signals sent 0 80 ms 0 Voice Mail to the Voice Processing System VPS ports 1 160 ms Integration 7 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals such as a mailbox 01 1 0s Integration number to VPS after VPS answers a call 10 1 5s 11 2 0s 8 Sets the time the system waits before 00 0 5s 10 Voice Mail sending DTMF signals programmed in 01 1 0s Integration 113 to VPS after the VPS calls an 10 1 5s extension 11 2 0s 9 Assigns whether the system turns off the 0 system 0 e Message Message Waiting lamp or the VPS does 1 VPS Wait
157. ay keep pressing NEXT at step 3 To assign every day of the week to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Sunday e If day night switching is unwanted select Disable at step 4 e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Night Service 4 38 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the sequence in which CO line groups will be accessed when in Automatic Line Access mode When a user dials the feature number for automatic line access default 9 or presses the L CO button an idle line is hunted in the programmed CO line group order CO line group number 1 through 8 eight entries max in desired order 12345678 1 Enter 103 Display Local Access 2 Press NEXT Display example Access 12345678 3 Enter the CO line group numbers in priority from top to bottom To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new order 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e There is a maximum of eight CO line groups Up to eight CO line group numbers can be entered e Automatic Line Access feature works only if Automatic Route Selection mode is turned off in program 312 ARS Mode Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic Line Prefer
158. b HOLD Used to place a call on hold INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls MESSAGE Used to send a message or display current message MONITOR Used for handsfree operation PAUSE Inserts a pause in a speed dial number PROGRAM Used to enter exit programming mode RECALL Allows you to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up Recall Sends a Register Recall signal to the Central Office or a host PBX to access their features External Feature Access REDIAL Used for Last Number or Automatic Redial SAVE Used to store a dialed telephone number for Saved Number Redial SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button function Soft Pressing a Soft button performs the function operation appearing on the bottom line of the display SP PHONE Speakerphone Used for handsfree operation Pressing the button causes the telephone to switch between handset and handsfree operation TRANSFER Transfers a call to another extension or external destination VOLUME Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast e Certain buttons are equipped with light indicators LED s to show line or feature status e CO buttons can be classified according to the following three types Single CO S CO button Group CO G CO button Loop CO L CO button Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible C
159. bove 4 142 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming 99 COS Additional Information Description 1 Sets the number of digits allowed to dial out during an outside call on a Class of Service COS basis If an outside party hangs up and the extension user tries to dial out still on the CO line the system will disconnects the line at the time the assigned digits are dialed This program can be added if CPC Signal Detection is not provided by the CO The Field 1 shown below is used to enter your selection 2 Enables or disables the Call Forwarding Follow Me feature on a COS basis The Field 2 below is used to enter your selection Display esaniple 1111111111110000 4 Field number unused 2 1 Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Field number 1 or 2 e Selection for field 1 0000 no limit 0001 1 digit 0010 2 digits 0011 3 digits 0100 4 digits 0101 5 digits 0110 6 digits 0111 7 digits 1000 8 digits 1001 9 digits 1010 10 digits 1011 11 digits 1100 12 digits 1101 13 digits 1110 14 digits 1111 15 digits e Selection for field 2 0 disable 1 enable Default Field 1 All COS 0000 Field 2 All COS 1 Programming 1 Enter 991 Display COS Add Inf 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number Display example 1111111111110000 4 Keep pressing m or lt to move the cursor to the desired field
160. call on a disallowed CO line reorder tone is sent to indicate that the user cannot use the CO line e Day and Night Service are individually programmed Night Service 3 42 Features 3 Features C Programming References Section 4 System Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Co Line Group Description CO lines can be grouped into up to eight CO line groups This allows extensions to call outside parties without designating a specific CO line since a CO line is automatically selected from the designated CO line group All CO lines belonging to a CO line group follow the assignment determined for that CO line group A list of assignments for each CO line group is shown below e The destination of Intercept Routing e Disconnect Time e Register Recall Signal Time Host PBX Access Code e Pause Time used in Speed Dialing and Recall Conditions e Each CO line can only belong to one CO line group e CO lines in a CO line group are selected uniformly if all lines belong to the same system e If System Connection is employed a CO line group can include CO lines in both systems In this case a CO line is first selected from the user s system If all lines in the user s system are in use a line in the other system is selected Programming References Section 4 System Programming 401 CO Line Group Assignment 409 410
161. ccess Direct tena an A Be LL te Te BAe BaD 3 79 Line Access Individual ccccccscsssssssssssssessssssssssessssssssssssseseseeees 3 79 Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line 3 80 Line Preference Outgoing Idle Line No Line Prime Line 3 81 LOCKOUT aa A E vag ETE E ea Goan eae ane 3 82 Loop CO L CO Button Button Loop CO L CO ee 3 18 Manager Extension ecnin nna n isi 3 82 Message Waiting scicsvarcacsusescasisdbcacdunesvadleasepeacoasnceeee Aa Tiat 3 83 Microphone Mute s min aie A T a megs ed ERI Rs 3 84 Mixed Station Capacities onena ie E a Os 3 84 M d l EXPANSION arnir AR E TESS 3 85 M sicon Holdsesresigarns tiee ekaa a 3 86 10 Contents N O INT SHE Service 2c 4st as ctarconccusatengianedaaectueacasensuaetneiunccagnaseesl actasnanees 3 86 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA ccccccccccceceseessssseeeeeceees 3 87 Ones Touch Dialing ances nonnii tena ctdegancats aes ES 3 88 One Touch Transfer by DSS Button eee eeeceeeseceeeteeeenteeeeneeees 3 89 Operator eaan a ot pee eeremneet hat er Sais ae eto ee oe 3 89 Operator C alleas nn ne Pen CENT ea ene Oe ae een ee ne 3 90 PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY cccccccssecesececeseeeesseeeeseeees 3 91 Paging All scscsvsigpacescutina a a R A AEE passed R tune 3 91 Paging External sisiire rassegna a I ES 3 92 Paging Grop neroa a aa n aaant 3 93 Pat lleled Telephones sonnn n a a a 3 93 Pause Insertion
162. ck None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 CO line group line access 8 20 System speed dialing x 21 Station speed dialing 6X 22 Station speed dialing programming 60 23 Doorphone call 61 24 Paging external 62 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 63 27 Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line 4 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 Call park call park retrieve 52 36 Account code entry 49 37 Door opener 55 38 External feature access 64 39 Station feature clear 790 40 Message waiting set cancel callback 70 42 Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 710 43 Call pickup deny set cancel 720 44 Data line security set cancel 730 45 Call waiting set cancel 731 47 Pickup dialing program set cancel 74 48 Absent message set cancel 750 49 Timed reminder set cancel confirm 76 50 Electronic station lockout set cancel 77 51 Night service mode set cancel 78 52 Parallel telephone mode set cancel 69 53 Background music external on off 65 54 CO incoming call information log mode 56 55 CO incoming call information log lock 57 56 Timed reminder remote 7 Default feature numbers are shown above In addition to the flexible feature numbers above fixed feature numbers are provided Features 3 65 F 3 Featu
163. code If you are storing an account code enter the account code before the line access code Refer to Section 3 Account Code Entry If you are storing a number for CO Incoming Call Information Display with name enter hyphen after the line access code The system starts to compare the calling party s number with the System Speed Dialing Number stored after Example 9 12345678 Refer to Section 3 CO Incoming Call Information Display It is possible to store a number consisting of 25 digits or more by storing it in two speed dial numbers A line access code should not be stored in the second speed dial number To go to another speed dial number at steps 3 through 6 press SELECT and start with step 3 To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press m gt or lt lt Program 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set is used to give names to speed dial numbers Section 3 Features Special Display Features for KX T7235 System Speed Dialing System Speed Dialing 4 18 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 002 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References System Speed Dialing Name Set Assigns names to the system speed dial numbers assigned in program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set The large display telephone KX T7235 shows the stored name when performing System Speed Dialing e Speed dial number 000
164. completing the transfer Unscreened call transfer immediately releases the caller to the called party An intercom or an outside call can be transferred to an extension or to an outside party by Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to voice announce to the external party and transfer the call e Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform it e Transferring a call to an external party cannot be performed from a single line telephone Programming References Feature References Operation Reference User Manual Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 990 System Additional Information Field 1 ea as i al Section 3 Features Hold Recall DPT Features Call Transfer to CO Line Features 3 35 C 3 Features Call Transfer Screened to Extension Description Allows the extension user to voice announce to the extension and transfer the call Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 1 Feature References None Operation Reference DPT Features SLT Featu
165. ction System Programming 4 85 405 4 6 CO Line Programming CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set Description Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on incoming outside calls If this is programmed the system disconnects the line when the CPC Signal is detected Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Time milliseconds Disable no detection 02 through 75 x 8 is the actual time See the table on the following page Default All CO lines 44 352 ms Programming 1 Enter 405 Display CPC Detection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 44 4 Enter the time or press CLEAR to select Disable To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e CPC Signal Detection is effective only with the 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 KX TD816 CO05 through CO08 KX TD1232 CO09 through CO12 Master CO21 through CO24 Slave In this case D 4DID must be selected in program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents pr
166. ction press SELECT and then enter the number System Programming 4 7 4 1 2 Programming Ways Going to another program address After pressing STORE you can go to another program with either of the following two methods 1 To go to the next larger program address Press Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME DOWN e To go to the next smaller program address Press SHIFT Soft 1 SKP or VOLUME UP 2 To go to a specific program address Press END then enter the Program Address Method 1 is useful when you want to perform a series of programs consecutively For example to change the programming in addresses 000 to 008 use this method You can move from 000 to 001 from 001 to 002 and so on by pressing the SKP or VOLUME You can move in reverse order from 008 to 007 etc by pressing the SKP or VOLUME This method can also be used to move between neighboring program groups For example you can move between the program addresses 008 and 100 120 and 200 and so on Also you can move between the smallest program address 000 and the largest one 992 Method 2 is useful when you wish to jump to another program address For example you have just finished with program 006 and now you want to go to program 301 Neither SKP VOLUME nor SKP or VOLUME is convenient in this case So you should press END and enter 301 Note The following programming instructions suppose that you have alre
167. ction between the DSHS and a proprietary telephone No CAUSE SOLUTION Can you dial an extension The A B is connected to the H L j r L extension Use the correct cord inner 2 wires are for A B and the outer 2 wires are for H L The P1 P2 is connected to the L H P2 A H m H B A L B Pl DSHS extension Use the correct cord 2 wires second from the outside for H L and the outer 2 wires are for P1 P2 Connection between the DSHS and a single line telephone Yes CAUSE SOLUTION Continued to the following page The A B is connected to the H L A A B Fasi DSHS extension Use the correct cord inner 2 wires are for A B e If a telephone equipped with an A A1 relay is connected to the DSHS set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone to OFF Available for KX TD1232 only Troubleshooting 6 3 6 1 Troubleshooting Connection between the central office and the DSHS Continued from the previous page Can you dial No outonaCOQ m line CAUSE SOLUTION Reconnect the CO lines to the paired A B of the CO lines are connected to the A A telephone jack using 2 conductor wiring A r T B A B CO line DSHS CO lines are connected to the A B that
168. d If your CO does not send such signals it is recommended to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing outside calls CPC Signal Detection is effective only with the 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 KX TD816 CO05 through CO08 KX TD1232 CO09 through CO12 or CO21 through CO24 In this case D 4DID must be selected in program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type If your Central Office does not send CPC like signals it is also effective to limit the dialed numbers during a call by the program 991 COS Additional Information on a Class of Service basis to prevent unauthorized calls e If CPC Signal is detected during a Conference call the line is disconnected and the remaining two parties maintain the call Programming References Section 4 System Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set 991 COS Additional Information Field 1 Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Call Pickup CO Line Description Allows any extension user to answer an incoming outside call that is ringing at another s telephone Conditions e Call Pickup starts with the lowest CO number e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the call is picked up Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call pickup CO line 990 System Additional Information Field 16 3 32 Features Available
169. d at the beginning of the number e DID table number 1 through 4 e Number of digits to be added 3 digits max All DID tables Not stored 1 Enter 434 Display DID Add Dial 2 Press NEXT Display DID Table NO gt 3 Enter a DID table number To enter DID table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 102 4 Enter the number to be added To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another DID table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Each added number has a maximum of 3 digits consisting of 0 through 9 Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 106 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 435 DID Wink Time Out Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References DID outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program 432 DID Outgoing Assignment This program sets the time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with the service of your central office The system disconnects the CO line when the time out time expires e DID table number 1 through 4 x all DID tables e Time 1 through 127 x 64 milliseconds is the actual time All DID tables 16 1 Enter 435 Display Wink Timeout 2 Press NEXT Display DID Table NO gt 3 En
170. d with lightning protectors For details refer to Section 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Warning Warning Static sensitive connectors ais aes a Static sensitive devices are used eee T To protect printed circuit boards i from static electricity do not rae touch connectors indicated to the right To discharge body static touch ground or wear a grounding strap penea ey 4 To eT i Boonoooooo Installation 2 3 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 1 Unpacking When you unpack the main unit the following components should be included KX TD816 KX TD1232 Main Unit one one AC Cord one one Templet one one Screw three four Anchor Plug three four Pager Connector two Music Source Connector two Expansion line cord holder one one 4 pin plugs for doorphone or door two two opener connection 2 2 2 Name and Location Overview of the Main Unit External Music Jack Paging Jack System Clear Switch TT Reset Button EIA RS 232C HHU I Connector TH Earth Terminal Battery Adaptor HHI
171. ding SMDR System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer 2 28 Installation 2 4 Optional Cards and Units Installation 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units Expansion Units KX TD816 Expansion _ area 2 Expansion _ area Expansion Unit Connectors The location of the optional cards and units is shown below To protect the printed circuit boards P boards from static electricity do not touch parts on the P boards in the main unit and on the optional cards and units One 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 and or one of 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 can be installed to any of the two expansion areas 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 2 ISDN SO Line Unit n KX TD280 Remove the cover ISON tanner Y plate s on the front pe Patera teen eater ote cover System Programming is required for expansion unit location Refer to Section 4 3 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Default Area 1 4 CO Line Unit Area 2 8 Station Line Unit Installation 2 29 2 4 1
172. ditions The oldest telephone number will be eliminated when over the limited numbers are dialed out Programming References No programming required Feature References None Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manual CO Outgoing Call Log Extension Dialing Description Provides a display of extension names and numbers The user can call an extension by pressing the associated function button Conditions System programming of extension numbers and names is required Features 3 103 S 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Feature References None Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manual Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing oo Description A list of the names and telephone numbers stored for One Touch Dialing is displayed allowing the user to make a one touch call by name without having to know the number Conditions e It is necessary to program One Touch Dialing Numbers and Names into the 10 function buttons F1 through F10 e It is programmable to select the first display number or name Programming References Section 4 System Programming 990 System Additional Information Field 19 Station Programming cccccceecceseeeeeeteeeseenteeeeeees User Manual Station Speed Dialing
173. dress 607 for day or 608 for night Display example Doorphone in Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 1234 4 Enter the doorphone numbers To assign no doorphone press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new doorphone numbers 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 4 122 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night conta Feature References e To assign all jacks to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 e Two doorphones can be installed in each system In the case of KX TD1232 doorphones 1 and 2 are installed in the Master System 3 and 4 in the Slave if available e You can enter up to two for KX TD816 or four for KX TD1232 doorphone numbers for each extension Section 3 Features Door Opener Night Service Doorphone Call System Programming
174. e Station Programming Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone DPT user to customize the extension to their needs The following are the programming items available For DPT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Flexible Button Assignment Full One Touch Dialing Assignment Intercom Alerting Assignment Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Outgoing Station Programming Data Default Set Handset Headset Selection Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons For display DPT KX T7230 KX T7235 only Charge Fee Reference pre assigned extensions only Self Extension Number Confirmation For large display DPT KX T7235 only Station Speed Dialing Number Name Assignment For operator extension DPT only CO Incoming Call Information Log Lock Clear Remote Station Lock Control Features 3 109 S 3 Features Detailed information and programming instructions are described in the User Manual Station Programming Conditions During Station Programming the DPT is considered to be in busy status Programming References Station Programming cccccceecceseeeeeeneeeeeeteeeaeees User Manual Operator Service Features cccccesseesseeseeeteeeteees User Manual Remote Station Lock Control Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Station Programming Data Default Set Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to return all the foll
175. e Extension number 2 through 4 digits Disable no DIL 1 1 All CO lines Disable Day Night 1 Enter a program address 407 for day or 408 for night Display example DIL 1 1 Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number To disable DIL 1 1 press CLEAR Press STORE To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through C024 are for the Slave if available CO line numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e You set the extension numbers in program 003 Extension Number Set or floating numbers of pagers and the modem in program 813 Floating Number Assignment e Ifa CO line is also programmed for DIL 1 N in program 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Night Service 4 88 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night Description
176. e References Enables or disables the function of automatically holding the outside call when a DSS button on the DSS Console or digital proprietary telephone is pressed Enable Disable Enable 1 4 5 Enter 108 Display DSS Auto Hold Press NEXT Display example Auto HLD Enable Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END This assignment applies to all DSS buttons on all DSS Consoles and on all digital proprietary telephones in the system Section 3 Features One Touch Transfer by DSS Button 4 42 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Description Assigns the type of expansion cards units to be used in the system This allows the system to identify the card and or unit in each expansion location Selection KX TD816 e Areas 1 2 Expansion Area C 4CO S 2S0 E EXT D 4DID KX TD1232 e Master Slave e Areas 1 2 3 4 1 Inside the system C 8CO S 4S0 2 3 4 Expansion Area C 4CO S 2S0 E1 EXT1 E2 EXT2 D 4DID Default KX TD816 C E KX TD1232 Master and Slave C C E1 E2 Programming KX TD816 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT Display example Mast C E 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END KX TD1232 1 Enter 109 Display Expansion Card 2 Press NEXT to p
177. e References Operation References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Paralleled Telephone Not applicable Features 3 85 M N 3 Features Music on Hold Description While a party is on hold music is automatically sent Conditions e Operations such as Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Consultation Hold or Call Transfer generates Music on Hold The system has an internal music source However it may be necessary to connect a user supplied external music source such as a radio to the system Up to two music sources for KX TD1232 and one external music source for KX TD816 can be connected per system The music source is used for Music on Hold and or BGM In the case of KX TD1232 elect a music source for each usage Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 803 Music Source Use 990 System Additional Information Fields 1 20 Feature References Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operation References Not applicable Night Service Description This supports both Night and Day modes of operation The system operation for originating and receiving calls can be different for day and night modes The system operation for restricting toll calls can be arranged separately to prevent unauthorized toll calls at night Switching of the Day
178. e corresponding numbers assigned in program 003 Extension Number Set and program 813 Floating Number Assignment Section 3 Features Flexible Numbering 4 34 System Programming 4 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering contd 100 Feature Number List Number Feature Default 01 1st hundred extension block 2 02 _ 2nd hundred extension block 3 03 16 3rd through 16th hundred extension block None 17 Operator call 0 18 Automatic line access ARS 9 19 CO line group line access 8 20 System speed dialing x 21 Station speed dialing 6X 22 Station speed dialing programming 60 23 Doorphone call 61 24 _ Paging external 62 25 Paging external answer TAFAS answer 42 26 Paging group 63 27 ___ Paging group answer 43 28 Call pickup CO line 4x 29 Call pickup group 40 30 Call pickup directed 41 31 Call hold 50 32 Call hold retrieve intercom 51 33 Call hold retrieve CO line 53 34 Last number redial 35 _ Call park call park retrieve 52 36 _ Account code entry 49 37 ___ Door opener 55 38 External feature access 64 39 Station feature clear 790 40 __ Message waiting set cancel callback 70 42 _ Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 710 43 Call pickup deny set cancel 720 44 __ Data line security set cancel 730 45 __ Call wai
179. e event of a power failure In case of power failure the batteries automatically maintain the power to the main unit instantly The optional Battery Adaptor model KX A46 is required The Battery Adaptor should not be exposed to direct sunlight Keep the adaptor and car batteries away from heating appliances and fire Place car batteries in airy place When connecting the battery adaptor keep the following in mind e Make sure of the polarities of batteries and wires e Make sure do not short the batteries and wires e To connect the two batteries use accessory wire Car batteries Red Yellow 1 Assemble the cords and two car batteries Battery img Adaptor i 12 VDC 12VDC each as shown i i Blue g Accessory oe je 12 VDC Fuse Holder 2 Insert the plug of the battery adaptor into the battery adaptor connector on the main unit Connect the earth wire to the earth terminal on the main unit Ground Wire LED Power Switch Ground Wire 3 Turn on the power switch of the battery adaptor LED Power Switch 2 52 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 2 4 12 Battery Adaptor Connection Wall Mounting 1 Drive the accessory four small screws on the bottom of the unit 2 Place the metal plates so that the screw heads insert into the slots as shown
180. e extension number is determined the system operates the call in the same way as the DIL 1 1 operation If a DDI number cannot be converted to an extension number the call is put to IRNA destination Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 7 2 ISDN SO Line Unit Connection 3 50 Features 3 Features D Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 418 ISDN DDI Service Assignment 610 ISDN DDI Number Extension Number Transformation None Operation References Not applicable Direct In Lines DIL Description Conditions Enables an incoming outside call to go directly to one or more answering points DIL 1 1 puts an incoming outside call to a single destination Assignable destinations are 1 extension 2 modem 3 external pager This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls but can be used by only one extension to receive calls DIL 1 N puts an incoming outside call to multiple destinations Assignable destinations are extensions only This CO line can be used by multiple extension users to make and receive calls Both DIL 1 1 and 1 N can have different destinations for day and night modes Night Service e Ifa CO line is programmed for both DIL 1 1 and DIL 1 N it is regarded as a DIL 1 1 line e DIL 1 1 to the modem allows the caller to perform remote administration DIL 1 1 to an ext
181. e is effective only during an outside call e The Register Recall Signal must be assigned as required by the host PBX or CO line e With a proprietary telephone the RECALL button or the feature number is used to perform this function With a single line telephone the feature number is used to perform this feature e During outside calls a RECALL stored in System Speed Dialing Station Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing functions as External Feature Access not as Recall Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering External feature access 413 Register Recall Signal Time 990 System Additional Information Field 3 Feature References Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Recall Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual External Feature Access Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 63 E F 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Description EXtra Device Port XDP expands the number of telephones available in the system by allowing an extension jack to contain two telephones A digital proprietary telephone DPT and a single line telephone SLT can be connected to the same jack but have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions Conditions e XDP requires previous programming of the individual jack Enable XDP mode for the desired jack by system programming Immediately after changing the assignment changed setting may not
182. e locked extension and toll restricted extension by system programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 414 Disconnect Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 Feature References Section 3 Features External Feature Access Operation References DPT Features User Manual Recall Features 3 97 R 3 Features Redial Automatic Description This is a special feature for the digital proprietary telephones that provides automatic redialing of the last dialed saved number or call log if the called party is busy If the Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial or CO Outgoing Call Log operation is performed handsfree the telephone set will hang up and try again after a pre determined period of time Conditions e Redial Repeat Time and Interval Time can be changed by system programming e Pressing RECALL button allows the system to cancel this feature e If any dialing operation is done during Automatic Redial this function is finished e This feature is not available with KX T7250 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Operation References DPT Features User Manual Redial Automatic Redial Last Number Description Every telephone in the system automatically saves the last telephone number dialed to a CO li
183. e provides direct access to stations and busy lamp display as well as providing 16 PF Programmable Feature buttons The DSS Console must be programmed to work with a digital proprietary telephone DPT System programming assigns the jack numbers of the DSS Console and its associated DPT Up to four consoles can be installed per system A DPT can be paired with up to four DSS Consoles The paired telephone user can carry out the following operations using the DSS Console e Direct access to an extension Direct Station Selection e Quick access to an outside party One Touch Dialing e Easy transfer of an outside call to an extension The programmable One Touch Transfer feature provides simplified operation e Quick access to a system feature The above functions are enabled simply by pressing buttons on the console which were pre programmed as function buttons A DSS Console has two types of buttons Features 3 59 3 Features DSS Console KX T7240 Panasonic DIGITAL DSS buttons PF buttons DSS Direct Station Selection buttons Used to access extensions Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension Pressing a button allows the user to call the corresponding extension Every button is provided with an indicator Busy Lamp Field which shows the current state of the corresponding extension as shown in the Table b
184. e second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 Not Stored 4 Enter a name For entering characters see Section 4 1 3 Entering Characters To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new name 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 names for KX TD816 and 128 names for KX TD1232 Each name has a maximum of 10 characters e Program 003 Extension Number Set is used to assign extension numbers 4 22 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 004 Extension Name Set contd e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Feature References Section 3 Features Display Call Information Intercom Calling Special Display Features for KX T7235 Extension Dialing System Programming 4 23 005 4 2 Manager Programming Flexible CO Button Assignment Description Used to determine the use of the flexible CO buttons on digital proprietary telephones from a centralized telephone Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 e Button Code plus parameter if required
185. e the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers Each speed dial number has a maximum of 24 digits The valid characters are 0 through 9 and keys RECALL PAUSE SECRET and hyphen buttons To store the register recall signal press RECALL Note The stored recall will be in effect only during an established call Refer to Section 3 External Feature Access To store a hyphen press the ee 99 button System Programming 4 17 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Number Set conta Feature References To store a pause press PAUSE Refer to Section 3 Pause Insertion Automatic To store the feature number to convert pulse signals to DTMF signals press the keys Refer to Section 3 Pulse to Tone Conversion To prevent the display of all or part of the number press SECRET before and after confidential parts of the number The SECRET button must always be entered in a pair Or your entry is not stored Refer to Section 3 Secret Dialing e If you are storing an external number include the line access code default 9 81 through 88 before the number When dialing pause is automatically inserted after the
186. e wires to the doorphone 1 or and 2 or door opener 1 or and 2 E Doorphone DOORPHONI E Doorphone 2 Doorphone 1 4 conductor wiring sense sens Q EA ER z U Ess HEC Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 KX T30865 KX T30865 2 46 Installation 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection E Door Opener DOORQPENER 2 H Door opener 2 H Door opener 1 4 conductor wiring is required gt To door opener 2 gt To door opener 1 Notes For wiring it is recommended to use UL 1015 twisted wire or the equivalent e The wire should be between 1 2 and 2 4 mm in diameter including the coating yd D 1 2 2 4 mm WD a L e Pair the door opener with the doorphone Installation 2 47 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Maximum distance of doorphone and door opener line The maximum length of the doorphone and door opener line that conn
187. eatures e If the operator uses the paired DSS console the operator can refer to the check in status on the DSS console e It is possible to give a header to the printed bill such as the hotel s name or greeting or to assign the starting location of output data with a personal computer e A new page is started for each print out e It is possible to limit telephone usage to a pre assigned amount by System Programming e The KX TD1232 with the KX TD180D or KX TD181D supports the Pay Tone service of the Central Office e Your Central Office sends the pay tone or the ISDN SO line sends pay message so that the counting for fee starts for the call Programming References Section 4 System Programming 009 Budget Management 010 Charge Margin Rate 121 Hotel Application 436 Pay Tone Assignment 601 Class of Service Feature References Section 4 Features Budget Management Charge Fee Reference Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Hotel Application Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call Description Allows the operator to set cancel and confirm the wake up call remotely for an extension Conditions When either an operator or the extension sets a new time the pre set time is cleared Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Timed reminder remote Feature References Section 3 Features Timed Reminder Operation References Operator Service Features Use
188. eatures Background Music BGM Background Music BGM External Music on Hold Installation 2 25 2 3 8 Printer Connection A user supplied printer can be connected to the EIA RS 232C connector 25 pin on the main unit The printer is used to print out SMDR call records and system programming data Connect the EIA RS 232C printer connector to the EIA connector Cables must be shielded the maximum length is 2 m lt ey L J EIA Connector Serial Printer Serial Interface 25 pin RS 232C Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit The pin configuration of EIA RS 232C connector is as follows Pin Circuit Type S IN No ii EIA CCITT 1 FG Frame Ground AA 101 2 SD TXD Transmitted Data BA 103 3 RD RXD Received Data BB 104 4 RS RTS Request To Send CA 105 5 CS CTS Clear To Send CB 106 6 DR DSR Data Set Ready CC 107 7 SG Signal Ground AB 102 8 CD DCD Data Carrier Detect CF 109 20 ER DTR Data Terminal CD 108 2 Ready 2 26 Installation 2 3 8 Printer Connection Printer Personal Computer 25 pin Connection Chart EIA RS 232C port on EIA RS 232C port on the main unit the printer PC ra Signal Pin Pin Signal ee EIA Name No No Name EIA AA FG 1 1 FG AA BA
189. ecceecceseeeeeeteeeeceteeeseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Call Forwarding Follow Me Call Forwarding No Answer Description Calls to your extension are forwarded to another extension if you do not answer the call in a pre determined time Conditions e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DIL 1 1 Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e This function operates if an incoming call is not answered in a specific period of time Therefore this function also applies if your extension is busy and cannot answer the incoming call within the time e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination e No Answ
190. ection 4 System Programming 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set Feature References Section 3 Features System Speed Dialing Operation References Special Display Features for KX T7235 User Manual System Speed Dialing Features 3 105 S 3 Features Station Feature Clear Description Allows the extension user to cancel the functions set on the user s own telephone The following functions will be cancelled by this feature Absent Message Capability The message set on the telephone Background Music that has been turned on Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting enabled Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Message Waiting All the messages that have been left by other extension users Paralleled Telephone enabled Pickup Dialing Timed Reminder Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Station feature clear Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Station Feature Clear Station Hunting Description If a called extension is busy Station Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the extension group Idle extensions are automatically hunted according to the programmed type There are four hunting types available Circular Termination Voice Mail VM and Automated Attendant AA Circular hunting The extensions are hunted until an
191. ects to the main unit is as follows 120 m for 0 5 mm Doorphone KX T30865 120 m for 0 5 mm Door opener Note The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit Programming References Section 4 System Programming 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Door Opener Doorphone Call 2 48 Installation 2 4 10 System Connection To connect two main units use the optional System Inter Connection Cards two and the Connection Cable included in the cards 1 Insert the upper end of the System Inter Connection Card into the two hooks on the main unit of the Master System 2 Press the two corners at the lower end of the System Inter Connection Card 3 Connect the cord to the System Inter Connection Card connector Lm Iii ll My System Inter Connection Card 4 Open the latch on the card 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the Slave System using the other card 6 Insert one connection cable end to the Master System and insert the other end into the Slave System 7 Close the latches on both systems mmm I sc pms MLO i Connection Cable Available for KX TD1232 only Installat
192. ee digits If two digits are assigned some have three digits and some have four digits Two extension numbers can be assigned per jack If XDP is disabled for the jack in program 600 EXtra Device Port the extension number of the second part XX 2 is not available XX jack number For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Double entry or incompatible entry is invalid including the assignment of program 813 Floating Number Assignment Valid entry examples 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry examples 10 and 106 210 and 21 Program 004 Extension Name Set is used to give names to extension numbers Section 3 Features Display Call Information EXtra Device Port XDP Flexible Numbering Intercom Calling Special Display Features for KX T7235 Extension Dialing System Programming 4 21 004 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions 4 2 Manager Programming Extension Name Set Assigns names to the extension numbers programmed in program 003 Extension Number Set e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e Name 10 characters max All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 004 Display EXT Name Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select th
193. eeees 3 36 Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension ccccceesesesseeeeeseeeseeees 3 36 Call Waitin aso enre e e sua sew ytigasdied Sos saa aant 3 37 Charge F e Referee cisnienia a a 3 38 Class of Service COS ccccccccccccscsssssscececececeessnsesececeeseeeesssseeeseeeens 3 39 CO Incoming Call Information Display 0 0 0 0 ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteees 3 40 CO Incoming Call Information Log ee eee eeseceeeeeeeeeneeeneeees 3 41 CO Line Connection Assignment seesssseesseessessereseetesseesseesseessee 3 42 CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing sesssessessresserssessse 3 42 CO Teme Gr GU secs osa ccs yaceanseaseccidcspa A A E ARS 3 43 Conference hraoa Seaeig tuscan Ea E E a sean ES REESS 3 44 Conference Unattended a a a a A a R E 3 44 Confirmation Tones mise tes seat atic E e a A a A a ai 3 45 Consultation Hold ipsins asawisceunctsnapeatetiysesueual olages Ugnsueceye ad eaayeaceneds 3 46 Data Line Security Aha a ioe cease E esa S 3 47 Delayed Ringing Ringing Delayed eee eeeeeeseeeneeneeeeees 3 100 Dial Tone Distinctive n E a A e ER S 3 48 Dial Type Selection ssssccsnissssnidiissuinniaii ni 3 49 Direct Dialing In DDD w ccciduieienlibn en eee ee 3 50 Direct In Lines DIE sinse ae E AE E N Tii 3 51 Direct Inward Dialing DID sssssssssesssesssssresssessersseresseessseesseesseesseee 3 52 Direct Station Selection DSS Button Button Direct Station Selecion CDSS Akerra ines
194. eeteeeeeneeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Message Waiting MESSAGE Button Section 3 Features Dial Tone Distinctive Voice Mail Integration DPT Features SLT Features Message Waiting Voice Mail Integration Features 3 83 M Microphone Mute Description Conditions 3 Features Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to turn off the microphone for privacy reasons e This is effective for the microphone only your voice will only be muted during a handsfree conversation e The user can hear the other party s voice during Microphone Mute Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features Microphone Mute Mixed Station Capacities Description Conditions Connection References This system supports a wide range of telephone sets not only Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT in the Digital Super Hybrid System but also single line LD telephones 10 pps 20 pps employing dial pulse signals and single line MF4 telephones The super hybrid method used in this system allows any telephone to be connected to an extension jack without an adaptor If a telephone is replaced by another one the stored data such as feature button storage is held for the new one Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection 2 4 4 8 Station Line Unit Connection Programming References Feature References Operation
195. elephone user in the system The programming items are listed below 000 Date and Time Set 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set 002 System Speed Dialing Name Set 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set a a Entering the user programming mode Notes You can access these programs by entering the User Programming Mode as follows Before entering the mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Press PROGRAM X and enter the User Password default 1234 After entering the mode perform the same programming steps as the system programming steps in each program address e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed it is cancelled The User Password is not shown on the display The password can be changed by system programming Refer to Section 4 3 120 User Password During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension Only one digital proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 4 12 System Programming 4 1 5 Example of Programming The following programming instructions suppose that you have already entered programming mode and that you will employ method 2 on page 4 8 Example Program 001 System Speed Dialing Number Set Sample of Description Explanation 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Number S
196. elow Light State of extension Off Idle On Busy Busy Lamp Field Table To meet the user s various needs DSS buttons can be changed to the other function buttons PF Programmable Feature buttons printed as F1 through F16 These buttons are provided with no default setting The paired telephone user can program the buttons for the other function buttons 3 60 Features 3 Features E Conditions e Programming the DSS and PF buttons can be done only from the paired telephone using station programming or programming with a personal computer System programming with Proprietary Telephone is not available If the extension number assigned to a DSS button is changed to another number the DSS button automatically follows the new number Re programming is not necessary e During System Connection DSS Consoles must be paired with telephones in the same system Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 3 3 Extension Connection Programming References Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment Station Programming ccccceecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Feature References Section 3 Features Button Flexible One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Operation References DSS Console Features User Manual Electronic Station Lockout Description Allows the extension users to lock their stations so that other u
197. emove 0 Remove 0 digits to be deleted Add 10555 Add 10666 Enter the digits to be added Feature References Operation References User Manual Eventually if Modification Table 1 is applied the user dialed number 9 1 234 567 8910 is modified to 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 to access the least expensive Carrier E Similarly if Modification Table 2 is applied it is modified to 9 10555 1 234 567 8910 to access Carrier F Enter the Removed Digit program when it is necessary to delete some leading digits from the user dialed number For example if the user manually dials a Carrier Access Code but the carrier is not the least expensive modification is required For example to delete 10333 from the beginning of the user dialed number and to add 10555 enter 5 in Removed Digit program Enter 10555 in Added Number program When 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 is dialed 9 10333 1 234 567 8910 Five digits are deleted and 10555 is added here 10555 1 234 567 8910 is sent to the CO line Section 3 Features Line Access Automatic DPT Features SLT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic 3 10 Features 3 Features Flow Chart of ARS procedures A long distance call is made y Toll Restriction Check i Not Restricted Is ARS Access Code Default 9 dialed Restricted A
198. en slow flash Intercom call hold Green moderate flash Intercom call exclusive hold Consultation hold Green rapid flash Incoming intercom doorphone call Conditions None Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Operation References Not applicable Limited Call Duration Description Limited Call Duration is a system programmable feature that disconnects an outside call when a specified timer expires A warning tone is sent to the extension user 15 seconds 10 seconds and 5 seconds before the time limit Limiting the call duration can be enabled or disabled by Class of Service COS for each extension Conditions e Any outside call except CO to CO call is limited by this feature For CO to CO calls CO to CO Call Duration is activated e It is programmable to select the limited call either incoming and outgoing call or outgoing call only Programming References Section 4 System Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 990 System Additional Information Field 12 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to CO Line 3 76 Features 3 Features L Operation References Not applicable Line Access Automatic Description Allows the extension user to dial the automatic line access number and access an idle line
199. en you go off hook You must select a line to make a call 3 Prime Line Preference When you go off hook you are connected to the pre assigned line Assign a line as your prime line beforehand Conditions e Setting a new line preference feature cancels the previous setting e To set Prime Line Preference one prime line is selected from intercom or CO lines e The CO lines used by users must be connected by programming e To select Idle Line Preference CO lines available for the user should be programmed Also CO lines available for Automatic Line Access should be assigned e The user can override the Idle Prime Line Preference temporarily to select a specific line To select it press the desired line access button INTERCOM or CO button before going off hook or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button or if Full One Touch Dialing is enabled press One Touch Dialing DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Features 3 81 LM Feature References Operation References User Manual Lockout Description Conditions 3 Features Station Programming 0 cccccceecceseeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Butto
200. ence Outgoing Line Access Direct System Programming 4 39 106 4 3 System Programming Station Hunting Type Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to enable or disable hunting and set the Station Hunting type for each extension group There are four Station Hunting types available Circular Termination Voice Mail VM and Automated Attendant AA If circular hunting is assigned for a group all the extensions in the group are hunted until an idle one is found If termination hunting is assigned hunting stops at the extension which has the largest jack number in the group If VM hunting is assigned all the VM ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit Voice Mail Service If AA hunting is assigned all the AA ports of an extension group are hunted until an idle one is found to permit AA Service e Extension group number 01 through 16 all extension groups e Disable no hunting Terminate termination Circular VM voice mail AA automated attendant All extension groups Disable 1 Enter 106 Display Call Hunting 2 Press NEXT Display EXT GRP NO gt 3 Enter an extension group number To enter extension group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example Groupl Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE To program another extension group pr
201. ences User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call park call park retrieve 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Field 16 None DPT Features SLT Features Call Park Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description Conditions The Calling Party Control CPC Signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the CO line when the telephone is hung up at the other end To support efficient utilization of CO lines the system monitors their state and when CPC Signal is detected from a line the system disconnects the line and informs the extension with reorder tone e CPC Signal Detection is enabled or disabled on incoming and outgoing outside calls by system programming e Generally CPC Signal Detection works on incoming outside calls and does not work on outgoing outside calls except once they are placed on Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold or Consultation Hold In this case if Features 3 31 C 3 Features the extension user remains off hook after the completion of an outgoing outside call the system does not release all the switches used to establish the connection and a CO line connected will continue to be seized To prevent this it is administrable to make CPC Signal Detection work on outgoing outside calls Note Some Central Offices may send CPC like signals during the dialing sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminate
202. ephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines In direct sunlight and hot cold or humid places Temperature range 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs etc may damage the equipment or contacts Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong contact with the unit Near high frequency generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders On or near computers telexes or other office equipment as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners It is preferable not to install in the same room with the above equipment Install at least 1 8 m from radios and televisions both the main unit and proprietary telephones Do not obstruct area around the main unit for reasons of maintenance and inspection be especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the main unit Make sure to keep the following instructions when wiring 1 Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel with an AC power source computer telex etc If the cables are run near those wires shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and gr
203. equired for certain central offices CO to prevent toll fraud Some CO ignore the user dialed X and If your CO is such a type select 0 no check no check check Toll Restriction 15 Enables or disables the Recall function when receiving an outside call at a locked or toll restricted station Recall if enabled allows the user to make an outside call using the same line at the station This is also allowed for those extensions that have Account Code Verified All Calls mode assigned if 0 disconnection signal is selected in field 3 above pd disable enable Recall 16 Allows you to remove Confirmation Tone 3 This tone is sent when a conversation is established just after dialing the feature numbers for accessing the following features Call Pickup Paging Paging Answer TAFAS Answer Hold Retrieve and Call Park Retrieve disable enable Confirmation Tone 4 140 System Programming 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information conta 990 Field Description Selection Default References 17 A CO line set to pulse or call blocking mode 0 60 1 Dial Type in program 402 Dial Mode Selection can 1 67 Selection have two settings This assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing Select an appropriate ratio depending on the standard in your country 18
204. er Recall Time Call Forwarding No Answer Time Intercept Time Pickup Dial Waiting Time Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time CO to CO Call Duration Time First Digit Time Inter Digit Time Automatic Redial Repeat Times Automatic Redial Interval Time Call Duration Count Start Time Message Waiting Ring Interval Time DTMF Time CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set Pause Time Register Recall Signal Time Disconnect Time 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night System Additional Information Fields 6 through 8 Operation References Not applicable Timed Reminder Description Each time telephone can be set to generate an alarm tone at a preset as a wake up or reminder This feature can be programmed to be active only once or every day 3 118 Features 3 Features T Conditions e Be sure that the system clock works e Setting a new time clears the preset time e The alarm tone continues for 30 seconds To stop it lift the handset or with a digital proprietary telephone press any button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Toll Restriction Description Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Timed reminder set cancel confirm Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Timed Reminder Remote Wake Up Call DPT Features SLT Features Timed Reminder Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature that in conjunction w
205. er timer is activated in the following cases Busy Station Signaling BSS While the caller hears dial tone Features 3 25 C 3 Features Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Call Forwarding Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time Station Programming cceccccecceseeeseeeneeeeceteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button None DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding No Answer to CO Line Calls directed to your extension will be sent to an external destination The outside telephone number must be pre programmed e Types of calls which are forwarded by this function are Outside calls DIL 1 1 DID DDI Intercom calls Extension Transfer e The forwarding extension s Toll Restriction Automatic Route Selection and Account Code Entry requirements still apply e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
206. ered together The highest priority CO line group number and modification table number is entered first left to right e Programs 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit and 331 ARS Modify Added Number are used to make up eight Modification Tables Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS 4 78 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit Description Determines how the dialed number should be modified before sending to the central office You can delete the digits from the beginning of the dialed number Selection e Modification table number 1 through 8 e Number of digits to be deleted 0 through 9 O no deleting Default All modification tables 0 Programming 1 Enter 330 Display ARS Modify Remov 2 Press NEXT Display Modify Table gt 3 Enter a modification table number To enter table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 0 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another modification table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired modification table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions There is a maximum of eight Modification Tables Each table has a 1 digit number of digits to be deleted Feature References Section 3 Features Automatic Route Selection ARS System Programming 4 79
207. ernal pager sounds the pager when receiving incoming calls TAFAS feature Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night None Operation References Not applicable Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 51 D 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID Description Incoming calls can be put through directly to destinations in accordance with the subscriber numbers sent from the Central Office You can also make outside calls through this feature Assignable destinations are 1 extension 2 external pager for TAFAS 3 modem for remote system administration Conditions e Exactly how a subscriber number received from the exchange is converted into an extension number programmed in 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed Digit and Received Digit and 434 DID Added Number is explained below using an example lt Example gt DID Table settings Received Digit 4 Deleted Digit 2 Added Dial No 2 Subscriber number received from the exchange 43112 Processing lt 1 gt 2 in 43112 is ignored since there are four received digits This leaves 4311 lt 2 gt 43 is deleted since there are two deleted digits This leaves 11 lt 3 gt Added Dial No 2 makes the final number 211 which serves as the extension number Note that digits are inserted at the begin
208. ers use the volume control on the amplifiers e Output impedance 600 Q Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 Speaker Amplifier Optional Line o 200 Isolation Unit Paging Equipment 2 Note Amplifier Optional Line Isolation Unit Paging Equipment 1 It is an Austel requirement that an optional Line Isolation Unit obtainable from your installer be fitted between the Paging jack and the Paging equipment Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 804 External Pager BGM 805 External Pager Confirmation Tone Section 3 Features Background Music BGM External Paging External Paging All Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Installation 2 23 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection KX TD816 One music source such as a radio user supplied can be connected to KX TD816 as illustrated below Use a two conductor plug 3 5 mm in diameter Insert the plug to the earphone headphone jack on the external music source e Input impedance 8 KQ External Music Jack Optional Line Isolation
209. es for KX T7235 Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Station Programming cccccceecceseeeeeeeneeeeeeteeneeees User Manual Full One Touch Dialing Assignment Section 3 Features Button Direct Station Redial Saved Number Selection DSS Special Display Features for One Touch Dialing KX T7235 Redial Last Number DPT Features Full One Touch Dialing Handset Headset Selection Description Conditions The system supports the use of headsets on proprietary telephones e The headset is an user supplied item e To set headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone DPT use station programming To set headset mode on an analog PT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Programming References Feature References Operation References Station Programming cceccceccceseeeeeeeneeeeenteeeeeees User Manual Handset Headset Selection None None 3 68 Features 3 Features H Handsfree Answerback Description Allows the speakerphone telephone user to talk to a caller without lifting the handset if the user has set handsfree answerback mode If the user receives an intercom call in the mode handsfree conversation is established immediately after the user hears beep tone and the caller hears confirmation tone Conditions e Handsfree answerback mode is set or cancelled by pressing the AUTO ANSWER
210. esooesosssesoossosssesssse Deed Unpacking noseiu a E E A EE 2 2 2 Nameand Locati Nee niscenire 2 2 3 About the Remote Card KX TD196 cc ccccesesseeeeeeees 2 24 Wall Mowing js c200 occ cates tome aden a bat 2 2 5 Frame Earth Connection acount incusawe ieee as 2 2 6 Opening Front C OVer ssn its gts n cel ect ea tat loeb ten seett ta aa COTTE CLIO a ccsisdscscasassecstaseactssseteeoesncacsasseasecttneseacguessneseuseoscoosesensenenes 2 3 1 System Connection Diagram ici c iseeaieawee tale anaes 2 3 2 CO Line Connection KX TD816 CO 1 through CO 4 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 0 2 3 5 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 2 3 6 External Pager Connection s i0 c2scsseet niece anaes detiasteiad 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection c cceescceeeseeeesseeeenteeees 2 3 8 Printer Connect oN insna a aieas Optional Cards and Units Installation cccsccsssscsssccsseseees 2 4 1 Location of Optional Cards and Units sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesereeeeee 2 4 2 CO Line Connection KX TD1232 CO 1 through CO 8 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation seeeeeseeeseeeeeeseresreesrsersreess 2 4 4 8 Station Line Unit Connection
211. ess NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired extension group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e Program 602 Extension Group Assignment is used to assign the extension group members e The system supports a maximum of 8 jacks 16 jacks during System Connection for KX TD1232 for connection to a Voice Processing System as VM or AA ports Section 3 Features Station Hunting Voice Mail Integration 4 40 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 107 System Password Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the password required for entering system programming mode and for maintenance from a personal computer Password 4 through 7 digits 1234 1 Enter 107 Display System Password pA Press NEXT Display example Password 1234 3 Enter a password To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new password 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e The password can be from four to seven digits long The valid numbers are from 0 through 9 e If less than four digits are entered they are not stored e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer System Programming with Digital Proprietary Telephone System Programming 4 4 108 4 3 System Programming One Touch Transfer by DSS Button Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Featur
212. estricted telephone The user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialing the telephone number Conditions e The toll restriction level of the user is changed to level 2 by this feature Thus this can be used by extension users assigned a toll restriction level from 3 through 6 The levels 1 and 2 are not changed e A Class of Service which is assigned Account Code Entry Verified Toll Restriction Override permits the class members to override their toll restrictions e Up to 40 account codes can be programmed by station programming for Verified Account code operation These are used for Toll Restriction Override e If the user does not enter any account code or enters an invalid account code an ordinary toll restriction check is done Flow Chart of TRS Override by Account Code Entry TRS Override by Account Code Entry is attempted Option Yy Verified All Calls What is the account code mode Verified Toll Restriction Override No y a Is the entered code identified with the stored codes Yes y Yes 7 Is the entered code identified ag Is the TRS level Level 1 with the stored code No Yes No y TRS level changes to Level 2 The call is not allowed Toll Restriction check starts lq Reorder tone is returned to the user Features 3 123 T 3 Features Programming
213. et Description Selection Default Conditions 4 Programming 19 Used to program the System Speed Dial numbers These numbers are available to all extension users There are 500 numbers from 000 through 499 e Speed dial number 000 through 499 e Telephone number 24 digits max All speed dial numbers Not stored 1 Enter 001 Display SPD Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display SPD Code gt 9 aD 3 Enter a speed dial number To enter speed dial number 000 you can also press NEXT Display example 000 Not Stored 4 Enter a telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another speed dial number press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired speed dial number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 9 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 500 speed dial numbers Each speed dial a wm 2 wm 3 4 wm 5 6 7 8 9 Program address This address is printed at the top of every page to allow you to quickly find the desired program Running title tells you which group the program belongs to Program title Provides a more detailed description of the program Shows you choices that you can assign Shows you the default factory setting Shows you programming procedures step by step e While programming
214. extensions for KX TD1232 jacks 17 through 32 use two KX TD170s This unit can be installed in any of the expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For the unit installation see Section 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 2 4 5 4 CO Line Unit Connection To add four CO lines KX TD816 CO 5 through CO 8 KX TD1232 CO 9 through CO 12 use the optional 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D This unit can be installed in any of the expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For the unit installation see Section 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 2 4 6 4 DID Line Unit Connection To add four DID lines KX TD816 CO 5 through CO 8 KX TD1232 CO 9 through CO 12 use the optional 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 This unit can be installed in any of the expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For the unit installation see Section 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 2 4 7 2 ISDN S0 Line Unit Connection To add two ISDN SO lines KX TD816 ISDN 1 and ISDN 2 KX TD1232 ISDN 5 and ISDN 6 use the optional 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 This unit can be installed in any of the expansion areas provided on the front of the main unit For the unit installation see Section 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 2 38 Installa
215. from the CO line groups assigned for the extension The digital proprietary telephone user can use the Loop CO button in place of the access number Conditions e This feature functions with Automatic Route Selection ARS if ARS is enabled If so the least expensive route is automatically selected Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access An idle CO line is selected from the CO line groups assigned to the station If one CO line group is available an idle line is selected from that group If multiple CO line groups are available the CO line group hunting sequence is determined by system programming This feature requires a CO button G CO L CO or S CO assignment on a digital proprietary telephone DPT Dialing the line access code selects a CO button on a DPT according to the priority S CO gt G CO gt L CO on a hunted CO line group If Idle Line Preference Outgoing is set on the telephone the user can access an idle line only by going off hook The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Automatic line access ARS 103 Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing
216. functions if any e Class of Service programming determines the extensions that are able to perform the function e If an extension is limited by the program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit according to its Class of Service the extension is unable to forward an outside call to a CO line e If a call between an extension and an outside party is established by this feature the duration of the call period can be restricted depending on the setting of a system timer Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel 3 26 Features 3 Features C Feature References Operation References User Manual 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line Station Programming cceecceecceeeeteeeneeeeenteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Hold CO Line Description Conditions Allows the extension user to put an outside call on hold The held call can be retrieved from the user who held it or from any other extension e With a single line telephone the user can hold only one call whether it is an extension or outside call e Music is sent to the party on hold
217. g outside call is received Any extension user can answer the call e Connect a user supplied external paging device e One external pager can be installed in KX TD816 Two external pagers can be installed in KX TD1232 per system and System Connection permits four pagers maximum These pagers are numbered from 1 through 4 To answer an incoming call dial the feature number and 1 to 4 The feature number is the same as that used to answer Paging External e Floating numbers of pagers are programmable e TAFAS can be used in the following cases a The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the DIL 1 1 destination In this case all the incoming calls on the specified line will be signalled b The floating number of an external pager is assigned as the Intercept Routing destination In this case incoming calls redirected to the destination will be signalled e Confirmation tone is sent to the user before being connected to the caller Eliminating the tone is programmable Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Pager Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging external answer TAFAS answer 813 Floating Number Assignment 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Floating Station DPT Features SLT Features Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS
218. g still applies for calls directed to other extensions in the Hunt group e Setting this function cancels other Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb functions if any e A Floating Station cannot be programmed as the forwarded destination Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding Do not disturb set cancel Station Programming ccceccceecceseereeeneeeeeneeenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Feature References None 3 22 Features 3 Features C Operation References User Manual Call Forwarding Description Conditions DPT Features SLT Features Call Forwarding All Calls Busy A call directed to your extension is forwarded to another extension if your telephone is busy e Types of calls which are forwarded by this feature are Outside calls DIL 1 1 Intercept Routing Intercom calls Extension Transfer e There can only be one stage of Call Forwarding if a call is forwarded to a station which is also in Call Forwarding In this case Station Hunting is activated for the forwarded call e Although calls are forwarded Message Waiting is not The MESSAGE button indicator is lit on the originally called extension e If an extension in Call Forwarding is also in a Hunt group a call directed to the extension is forwarded Station Hunting still applies for calls directed to
219. ger The pager is a user supplied item One pager and one external music source can be installed in KX TD816 and up to two pagers and up to two external music sources can be installed in KX TD1232 per system e For Music Source 1 it is possible to select the internal or external music source by system programming e Each pager can be programmed to send BGM or not e Priority of access to external pager is 1 TAFAS 2 Paging 3 BGM Higher priorities will override BGM Section 2 Installation 2 3 6 External Pager Connection 2 3 7 External Music Source Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Background music external on off 803 Music Source Use 804 External Pager BGM 990 System Additional Information Field 20 Section 3 Features Background Music BGM Operator Service Features Background Music BGM External Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a pre assigned amount For example the limit may be the amount deposit during a hotel at check in If the pre assigned limit is reached the extension user cannot make further calls until he she receives authorization from the operator Features 3 13 B 3 Features Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 010 Budget Management Feature References Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICA
220. ginating a call to a line which is not connected e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Connect No Connect All CO lines Connect 1 Enter 400 Display CO Connection 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Connect 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment System Programming 4 81 401 4 6 COLine Programming CO Line Group Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Each CO line must be assigned to a CO line group This program defines the CO line group assignment for each CO line For example if there are multiple telephone service companies available the CO lines can be grouped by company e CO line CO number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 0
221. gle Line Telephone Method 2 Using a TO TEL Jack 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A and B 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins L A B and H Rear of the telephone Telephone Notes Feature References Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 To main unit TO EMSS is printed To Single Line Telephone TO TEL is printed e Not only a single line telephone but a single line device such as an answering machine a facsimile or a modem personal computer etc can be connected in parallel with a digital proprietary telephone The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit Section 3 Features Paralleled Telephone 2 20 Installation 2 3 5 EXtra Device Port XDP Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins L and H only A and B are not necessary Digital Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Note With the eXtra Device Port XDP connection a digital proprietary telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 or KX T7250 and a single line telephone can be connected to the same extension jac
222. h 7 9 Press END 4 120 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night contd Conditions Feature References e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks or all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 or 4 In these cases the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 or COO1 e To assign no CO line group for a station press CLEAR at step 4 Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Night Service System Programming 4 121 607 608 4 8 Extension Programming Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Description These programs assign the extensions which will ring when a doorphone call is received during the day and night modes Programmed extensions are also allowed to open the door Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Doorphone number KX TD816 1 and 2 two entries max KX TD 1232 1 through 4 four entries max Default Jack 01 1 All doorphones Other jacks no doorphone Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program ad
223. h access to an extension and provide Busy Lamp Field e KX T7235 user can make an extension call with an extension dialing directory on the display Features 3 73 3 Features e After dialing an extension number the user will hear one of the following Ringback tone indicates that the other extension is being called Confirmation tone indicates that the user can perform Voice Calling Busy tone indicates that the other extension is busy Do Not Disturb tone indicates that the other extension has DND assigned Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 004 Extension Name Set 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks Station Programming 0 ceccceecceeeeeeeeneeeeeneenseees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment DSS Button Section 3 Features Busy Lamp Field Button Direct Station Selection DSS DPT Features SLT Features Intercom Calling LED Indication CO Line Description The LED Light Emitting Diode indicators of the buttons associated with CO lines tell the line conditions with a variety of lighting patterns This allows the user to determine which lines are idle and which lines are in use The table below shows the lighting patterns and line conditions according to the CO button type LED Indicator CO Line Status
224. he called party with the CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature offered by the ISDN network service e CO line number KX TD816 05 through 08 KX TD1232 01 through 24 Telephone number 16 digits max All CO lines Not stored 1 Enter 416 Display ISDN CO NO 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Not Stored 4 Enter the telephone number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through C024 are for the Slave if available e To display parts of the number which have scrolled off the display press a gt or lt e Your telephone number is informed to the called party if outgoing CLIR feature is disabled for the ISDN SO line by program 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Section 3 Features CO Incoming Call Information Display CO Incoming Call Information Log Direct Dialing In DDD System Programming 4 97 417 46 COLine Programming ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Description Assigns whether ISDN CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction service is enab
225. he connectors to the system as shown For Cable Pin Numbes to Be Connected see page 2 16 Mis connection may cause the system to operate improperly See Section 6 1 1 Installation and 6 1 2 Connection before connection Connector type 50 pin Amphenol 57JE series or the equivalent 25 1 I 50 26 To extensions d Jacks 9 16 R To extensions gt Jacks 1 8 After inserting the connector fasten the connector with the nylon tie Installation 2 15 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Cable Pin Numbers to Be Connected CONN EXTN 1 8 EXTN 9 16 8EXTN SEXTNt 26 T T T T 1 R R R R 27 Jack p Jack D1 Jack D1 Jack Di 2 No l D2 No 9 D2 No 17 D2 No 25 D2 28 P1 P1 P1 P1 3 P2 P2 P2 P2 29 T T T T 4 R R R R 30 Jack p Jack D1 Jack D1 Jack D
226. he doorphone plate has been fixed to the wall ps Type 2 When you wish to install the doorphone directly to the wall 3 Connect the wires from the terminal box to the screws located in the front cover ZiT ojee Cem O Y H g3 4 4 Secure both halves together and re install the fore Bee screw LY CP To the terminal box See the following page Installation 2 43 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection 2 Connection for KX TD816 Wiring of the Doorphone 1 Connect the Doorphone Card to the terminal box using a 4 conductor modular connector 2 Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 3 Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 4 conductor wiring is required hee 4 Terminal Box Doorphone 1 f Doorphone 2 KX T30865 JOE KX T30865 ou Yellow K Black Red FH Green 5 O D 5 O UO 0000 OOOO OOOH JED DOOU S DU 2 44 Installation 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection
227. ible CO Button Assignment 6 1 4 Using Reset Button If the system does not operate properly use the Reset Button If Master and Slave Systems are in operation by System Connection reset both systems Before using the Reset Button try the system feature again to confirm whether there definitely is a problem or not Notes a When the System Clear Switch is set to NORMAL pressing the Reset Button causes the following 1 Camp on is cleared 2 Calls on Hold are terminated 3 Calls on Exclusive Hold are terminated 4 Calls in progress are terminated 5 Call Park is cleared Other data stored in memory except the above are not cleared b When the System Clear Switch is set to the CLEAR position you must press the Reset Button with caution because all data stored in memory will be cleared by the following operation pressing the Reset Button and setting the System Clear Switch to the NORMAL position while the Power Indicator is flashing Available for KX TD1232 only Troubleshooting 6 5 6 1 Troubleshooting Operation A If the system does not operate properly 1 Make sure that the System Clear Switch is set to the NORMAL position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool B If the system still does not operate properly 1 Set the System Clear Switch to the CLEAR position 2 Press the Reset Button with a pointed tool 3 Return the System Clear
228. ietary telephone user is in a conference with two outside parties the user can leave the conference to allow the other two parties to continue conversation This is called an Unattended Conference The user may return to the conference if desired e An Unattended Conference can be established when the extension is allowed to transfer a call to a CO line e The duration of an unattended conference is restricted by a system timer Hold Recall results to the extension user who left the conference 50 seconds before the time out Alarm tone is generated to both outside parties 15 seconds before the time out The call is disconnected at the time out unless the extension returns to the call 3 44 Features 3 Features C Programming References Section 4 System Programming 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line Feature References Section 3 Features Conference Limited Call Duration Hold Recall Operation References DPT Features User Manual Conference Unattended Confirmation Tone Description At the end of many different functions the system confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user through the speaker of the telephone Confirmation tone 1 a Indicates that the new setting differs from the previous setting b Set or cancel the Electronic Station Lockout l l a i i i i i i i i
229. il or Automated Attendant ports e Each mailbox number has a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e To display parts of the mailbox number which have scrolled off the display press m gt or lt Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 124 System Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 610 ISDN DDI Number Extension Number Transformation Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 1 first part 2 second part e DDI Number 1 through 6 digits All jacks Not stored 1 Enter 610 Display DDI No Trans 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 001 4 Enter a DDI number To delete the current entry press CLEAR 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 128 DDI numbers Each DDI number can be one through six digits consisting of 0 through 9 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System a
230. ime 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 1 5sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Host PBX Access Pause Insertion Automatic 4 92 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 413 Register Recall Signal Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the register recall signal time If your system is installed behind a host PBX External Feature Access EFA is necessary to obtain its services To enable it select a required register recall signal sending time for the CO line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 all CO line groups e Time milliseconds Disable no EFA 80 96 112 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 All CO line groups 96 ms 1 Enter 413 Display Register Recall 2 Press NEXT Display T
231. ine The Message Line upper shows you what you should do or what you should select It also allows you to confirm what you have just entered The display capacity is 16 digits If your entry exceeds the capacity you can shift the display by pressing gt or lt button The Function Line lower shows the current function of the soft buttons These functions change with the programming procedures SYS PGM NO gt NEXT lt Message Line lt Function Line KX T7230 Display SYS PGM NO gt lt Message Line lt Function Line KX T7235 Display Before entering the programming mode Before entering programming mode confirm that e Your telephone is on hook e No calls are on hold at your telephone Entering the programming mode Notes Press PROGRAM and enter your System Password default 1234 e The display shows the Initial Message SYS PGM NO gt e If nothing is entered in five seconds after the PROGRAM button is pressed it is cancelled e The System Password entered is not shown on the display The System Password can be changed by System Programming Refer to Section 4 3 107 System Password e During the programming mode your extension is treated as a busy extension e Only one digital proprietary telephone can be in programming mode at any one time 4 6 System Programming 4 1 2 Programming Ways Advancing to the next stage When SYS P
232. ing 6 1 Troubleshooting ssecesssooesssooesssocesesosccesosocesssoosessoseessoocosssscossssoosse 6 2 6T Installato cicsccenucictanunasadiihunsdiidanhagddeieian 6 2 6 1 2 Connecti o riaa i n a E E S ITa 6 3 61 3 Operationen ee e R E N 6 4 6 1 4 Using Reset Button sssessseseeseeesseessersseeesseeesseesseesseesseeesseee 6 5 Available for KX TD1232 only 15 Section 1 System Outline This section provides general information on the system including system capacity and specifications 1 1 System Highlights System Capacity Basic Module System System Expansion Connection KX TD816 CO line ISDN SO line 4 8 2 Extension 8 16 KX TD1232 CO line ISDN SO line 0 12 6 24 12 Extension 16 32 64 Module Expansion Expansion modules are used to increase the system capacity CO line modules and extension modules can be added to the basic system to add CO lines and extensions EXtra Device Port XDP Each extension jack in the system supports the connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device The devices have different extension numbers and are treated as two completely different extensions Paralleled Telephone Connection Every jack in the system also supports the parallel connection of a digital proprietary telephone and a single line device They share the same extension number and are considered by the system to be one extension Super Hybrid System This system supports
233. ing when the user hears a message recorded in a e Voice Mail mailbox Integration System Programming 4 139 990 4 11 Option Programming System Additional Information conta Field Description Selection Default References 10 Assigns whether the system starts the Automated Attendant Service or not if an outside call is directed to VPS by Call Forwarding or Intercept Routing If start is assigned the AA SVC code programmed in program 114 is transmitted to the voice mail port and the Follow On ID function does not work do not start start 0 Voice Mail Integration 1 If an outside party is transferred and unanswered assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer originating extension or at Operator 1 extension Operator 1 Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension 12 If Limited Call Duration is enabled in program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and incoming calls or for outgoing calls only pm both calls outgoing calls only Limited Call Duration 13 Allows you to remove confirmation tone 4 By default a beep tone sounds when a three party conference is started ended disable enable Confirmation Tone 14 Determines if the dialed X and will be checked by Toll Restriction This assignment is r
234. ing data stored in the system The system will restart with the default settings 1 Slide the system clear switch to CLEAR 2 Press the Reset button with a pointed tool 3 Return the system clear switch to NORMAL while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Notice After pressing the Reset button return the system clear switch to NORMAL at step 3 while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds Otherwise the system is not cleared Installation 2 59 Section 3 Features This section describes every basic optional and programmable features in alphabetical order It also provides information about the conditions connection references programming required related features and operation for every feature A 3 Features Absent Message Capability Description Once set this option provides a message on the display of the calling extension to show the reason for the called extension s absence Nine messages can be programmed as desired which are available for every extension user There are six pre programmed default messages Setting or cancelling a message can be done by individual extension users but only callers with a display telephone can receive the message Conditions e Six default messages which are changeable are shown below The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at individual extension 1 Will Return Soon
235. ion 2 49 2 4 10 System Connection 8 Open the ROM Cover in the Slave System and set the Master Slave switch on the CPU card to Slave YaISW AIS 9 Turn the power on Available for KX TD1232 Notes System Connection is completed about one minute later after the power is turned on e To turn the power on for the first time refer to Section 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time Programming References Section 4 System Programming 115 Adjust Time Feature References Section 3 Features System Connection 2 50 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 2 4 11 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Connection The optional Backup Battery and Adaptor Card KX A216 are available for KX TD816 It is a backup power supply to operate all the features in the event of a power failure In case of power failure the battery automatically maintains the power to the main unit instantly for about 10 minutes The battery charges automatically by itself when it is discharged You can choose KX A216 or KX A46 for a backup power supply For connection of KX A46 see the next page 1 Loosen the screw of the adaptor card cover 3 Fasten the nylon belt to fix the battery and remove the adaptor
236. ion is displayed Press STORE Press NEXT to program stop bit Display example Stop Bit 1bit Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END e The following combinations are invalid Parity Word Length Stop Bit Mark 8 2 Space 8 1 Space 8 2 e The program address of the out of service system port is unacceptable Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 133 813 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 10 Resource Programming Floating Number Assignment Assigns the floating numbers for External Pagers modem and the Digital Test Access DTA These numbers can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access e Floating station KX TD816 Pager1 DTA KX TD1232 Pager Pager2 Pager3 Pager4 MODEM DTA e Floating number 2 through 4 digits KX TD816 Pager 1 296 DTA 299 KX TD1232 Pager 1 296 Pager 2 297 Pager 3 396 Pager 4 397 MODEM 399 DTA 299 1 Enter 813 Display FLT EXT NO 2 Press NEXT to program Pager 1 Display example Pagerl EXT296 To program another floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 3 Enter a floating number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new floating number 4 Press STORE 5 To program ano
237. ions connection references related features and operation for every feature Section 4 System Programming Provides step by step programming instructions for a proprietary telephone Section 5 List Lists tone ring tone and default values of system programming Section 6 Troubleshooting Provides information for system and telephone troubleshooting NOTE The following documents may be used in conjunction with this manual e User Manual for KX TD816 KX TD1232 System DIGITAL Proprietary Telephones DSS Console and Single Line Telephones e Programming Table The programming table is designed to be used as a hard copy reference to the user programmed data Contents Section 1 11 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 System Outline System Highlights sess veisas caiep icin za We caps veh eas ce ee scbo ca vacsuneousey gen cciwatoes Basic System Construction scccscccssssccsssscsssscccsssscssssssssssssseesees Digital Proprietary Telephomes scccsscccsssscssssccssssccssssscsssscees CP GONG ss EEEE EEA TRAE ETON Specifications sisses oense i ersoy resin aens ETE EEEN OSEE NERE at 15 1 General Deseni py On sic sneins aaa TE 1 5 2 Charact ristieS osan naa ana R T eais LS Systemi Capacity nsien i a a a oes Installation Before Installati n 54s scnsesiscvstvicssaiccesvcsoncnsvascngedescsteeeseaseeercanvcewneasegesns Installation of the Main Unit eosoosooeseosoesooesosss
238. iption Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 10 Resource Programming System Data Printout Starts or stops printing of the system data All the current system programmed data is printed out Start Stop Not applicable 1 Enter 802 Display System Data Dump 2 Press NEXT Display Print Out Start 3 Press STORE to start printing Printing starts To stop printing in the middle of printing press SELECT and go to step 4 When printing is completed the display shows Display Print Out Finish 4 Press STORE Display Print 0ut Stop 5 Press END e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e You may stop printing by pressing the END button while records are being printed out e You cannot restart the printout while records are being output Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 128 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 803 Music Source Use Description Assigns the music source to be used for Music on Hold and Background Music BGM Selection Hold BGM e Music source number KX TD816 1 No Use KX TD1232 1 through 4 No Use Default Hold and BGM Music 1 Programming 1 Enter 803 Display Music Source Use 2 Press NEXT to program Music on Hold Display example Hold Musicl 3 Enter a music source number To select no music source press CLEAR
239. ith the assigned Class of Service can prohibit certain extension users from placing unauthorized toll calls Every extension is programmed to belong to one of eight Classes of Service Each Class of Service is programmed to have a toll restriction level for day mode and night mode There are eight toll restriction levels available Toll restriction level 1 is the highest level and the level 8 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all toll calls and levels 7 and 8 disallows all toll calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining pre programmed deny and excepted code tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing outside call made by an extension with a toll restriction level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the selected Denied Code Tables If the leading seven digits of the dialed number not including the line access code are not found in the table the call is made There are five system programs for Denied Code Tables 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each program is used to make up a Denied Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Each table can store up to 20 denied codes each of which consisting of seven digits Features 3 119 T 3 Features Excepted Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A call denied by the selected Denied Code Table
240. itions e System programming determines the extensions that can see charges e An identification code ID code set by system programming is required to see charges The first display format Pulse or AS is selected by system programming This can be switched manually at each extension Exchange rate between pulse counter and AS is changeable by station programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 117 Charge Display Selection 118 Charge Verification Assignment 119 Charge Verification ID Code Set Station Programming cccccceceeeeceeeceteceeeeeeeeenees User Manual Charge Fee Reference Feature References None Operation References Station Programming User Manual Charge Fee Reference 3 38 Features 3 Features C Class of Service COS Description Conditions COS is used to define the features which are allowed for a group of extensions For Check In Check Out feature primary and secondary COS numbers can be assigned per extension Eight Classes of Service are available e A list of the programmable items is given below 1 The ability to forward a call to an outside party enable disable 2 The ability to transfer a call to an outside party enable disable 3 The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the called station enable disable 4 Account Code Entry operation verified all calls verified toll restriction override optio
241. its KX TD816 Jack 01 1 through 16 1 201 through 216 Jack 01 2 through 16 2 301 through 316 KX TD1232 Jack 01 1 through 64 1 201 through 264 Jack 01 2 through 64 2 301 through 364 1 Enter 003 Display EXT Number Set 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display 01 1 EXT201 4 Enter an extension number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 32 extension numbers for KX TD816 and 128 extension numbers for KX TD1232 Each extension number can be two three or four digits consisting of 0 through 9 The and keys cannot be used e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available 4 20 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 003 Feature References Extension Number Set conta An extension number is invalid if the leading first or second digits disagree with the setting of the program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks If one digit is assigned as the leading digit some extensions have two digits and some have thr
242. ive seconds e Programs 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night are used to program the destination of Intercept Routing on a CO line group basis in day and night modes e If the original extension has set Call Forwarding No Answer Intercept Timer starts after the Call Forwarding e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Intercept Routing System Programming 4 59 204 4 4 Timer Programming Pickup Dial Waiting Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of seconds for Pickup Dialing If the telephone user lifts the handset the programmed party is called when the time expires Time seconds 1 through 5 ls 1 4 5 Enter 204 Display Pickup Dial Time Press NEXT Display example Time 1 sec Enter the time To change the current entry enter the new time Press STORE Press END This time gives the user an opportunity to dial digits before the automatic dialing process takes place Section 3 Features Pickup Dialing 4 60 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation with an outside party If an outside call is originated or answered by a programmed extension user and the timer expires the call is disco
243. k and have different extension numbers System programming is required A single line telephone and a digital proprietary telephone are connected to the main unit by 2 conductor and 4 conductor wiring cords 2 conductor wiring cord Connect pins A and B Single Line Telephone The KX TD12372 is illustrated as a main unit Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 600 EXtra Device Port Section 3 Features EXtra Device Port XDP Installation 2 21 2 3 6 External Pager Connection KX TD816 cal Panasonic One external pager user supplied can be connected to KX TD816 as illustrated below Use an RCA connector and shielded cable To adjust the sound level of the pagers use the volume control on the amplifiers e Output impedance 600 Q Paging Jack Gama om Amplifier Optional Line Isolation Unit Paging Equipment 2 22 Installation 2 3 6 External Pager Connection KX TD1232 Up to two external pagers user supplied can be connected to KX TD1232 per system as illustrated below You can program the external pager that will send background music and determine whether both pagers will generate a confirmation tone Use an RCA connector and shielded cable To adjust the sound level of the pag
244. lStatt Times 3ss sesseigi css ihaeenhich Waele hea 4 67 212 Call Duration Count Start Time 00 0 cece ecccccceeeeeserteeeees 4 68 213 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 4 69 TRS ARS Programming lt cciccsciiesicsenesscecsicesceseveossevnasovecosvavsesserceses 4 70 300 TRS Override for System Speed Dialing 0 0 ee eeeeeeeees 4 70 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 7 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 4 72 Sli Emergency Dial Setien sceni eee oe dees 4 73 B12 ARS AVIOdS cass on patient ed eae a ease h 4 74 BISI ARS Meserie Sessile Biden Dav Sea ev dann ns co SoBe 4 75 314 321 ARS Leading Digit Entry for Plans 1 through 8 4 76 322 329 ARS Routing Plans 1 through 8 00 0 eee eeeeeeeteeeeteee 4 77 330 ARS Modify Removed Digit cece eeeeseceeeeceteeeesteeeenaees 4 79 331 ARS Modify Added Number cee eeesececsseceesseceeseeeeeneees 4 80 13 Contents 4 6 CO Line Programming cscccsssccssssccsssscessscsessscsscessescsssescssseees 4 81 400 CO Line Connection Assignment ceecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 81 401 CO Line Group Assignment ccceccceceeceeceeeeeceteeeeeteeeenaees 4 82 402 Dial Mode Selection ccccccccesssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseeees 4 83 403 P ls Speed Selection nccrne a 4 84 404 DEME Time aea a a o ease nde pwd eves 4 85 405 CPC Signal Detection
245. lay DND Override 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Override 4 112 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 508 Description Option mode Account Code Entry Mode There are three account code modes Option Verified All Calls and Verified Toll Restriction Override This program determines the mode to be used by each Class of Service COS The user can enter any account code if needed Verified All Calls mode The user must always enter a pre assigned account code to make an outside call Verified Toll Restriction Override mode Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References The user must enter a pre assigned account code when the user needs to override toll restriction e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS e Option Verify All Verified All Calls Verify Toll Verified To
246. led or disabled for outgoing outside calls If disabled the subscriber s number of your system is informed to the called party Selection CO line number KX TD816 05 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines Enable Disable Default All CO lines Enable Programming 1 Enter 417 Display ISDN CLIR Send 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO 24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 e Program 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment is used to store the subscriber s number of your system that is informed to the called party Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR CO Incoming Call Information Display 4 98 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 418 ISDN DDI Service Assignment Description Enables or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line Selectio
247. ll Restriction Override All COS Option 1 Enter 508 Display Call Accounting 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Option 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Station programming is used to define the Account Codes for the Verified modes e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Account Code Entry Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry System Programming 4 113 600 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 8 Extension Programming EXtra Device Port EXtra Device Port XDP allows a single line telephone SLT to be connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone DPT This program assigns which jacks are XDP The SLT and DPT of the programmed jack work as independent extensions e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 X all jacks KX TD1232 01 through 64 all jacks e Disable Enable All jacks Disable 1 Enter 600 Display XDP Assign 2 Press
248. lues 800 816 Resource Programming Assignment of customer supplied peripherals connected to the system 990 991 Option Programming Used to answer the user s requirements or troubles if needed 4 14 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 000 Date and Time Set NOTICE It is assumed that you have read Section 4 1 General Programming Instructions The use of the soft buttons is discussed in the section therefore we will not make any reference to them in the following instructions At any time the soft buttons can be used in place of the overlay keys Description Selection Default Programming Sets the current date and time e Day 1 through 31 e Month Jan through Dec e Year 00 through 99 e Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT e Hour 1 through 12 e Minute 00 through 59 e AM PM 1 Jan 94 SAT 12 00 AM 1 Enter 000 Display Day Time Set 2 Press NEXT Display example 1 Jan 94 SAT 3 Enter the day To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new day 4 Press gt 5 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired month is displayed 6 Press m 7 Enter the year To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new year 8 Press m gt 9 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired day of the week is displayed System Programming 4 15 000 Conditions Feature References 4 2 Manager Programming Date and
249. mda dsieetidcatantulaacous 3 4 Automatic Callback Busy Camp O n ceeeesseceseeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeees 3 5 Automatic Redial gt Redial Automatic ccccccccceccccsesseessseesesereeees 3 98 Automatic Route Selection ARS xaiciscssdssccccssenciciesssccadeasssmcetileccanas 3 6 Automatic Station Release scscissirsctietnsnatedlnss Sennauacenadeeivanntanidotesien ceutaeres 3 12 B Background Music BGM ccsdasiuientasarsocessudeteaiabsecsiandentaneeniviedancans 3 12 Background Music BGM External cee eeeceeceeeeeeeseeeseneeeeeeeees 3 13 Budget Managements snenonarnosiieas nema ieee A ne ened 3 13 Busy Team ces a esd a gee ee cade cee 3 14 Busy Station Signaling BSS eesessessssessseessessssessssesssssessseseessessssseess 3 14 Button Direct Station Selection DSS ssssssnnessssssessseesessssesesreeesssse gt 3 15 Buttons Flexible nmennneininesmei a ENEE N 3 16 Button Group CO GOO erarsre secen 3 17 Button Loop CO CO gic dancedanscectelsstecuntgestedesseceenleretutadcasieutgeats 3 18 Button Sing le CO SCO sass cedecncdtieses eaceseetet cacecdioreeei eines 3 19 Buttons on Digital Proprietary Telephones ces eeeeeeseeeteceeeeeees 3 20 C CALL FORWARDING FEATURES SUMMARY osese 3 22 Call Forwarding All Calls cc acencaticeecsceesdpateaetennue Uaatea ieee aebeeanuaceeves 3 22 Call Forwarding BUSY ssrin saaana E E E 3 23 Call Forwarding Busy No ANSWEt sseseeeseesesererrrresreerrreresrresee 3
250. med for COS 1 Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension e Program 990 System Additional Information Field 12 is used to program Limited Call Duration to be done for outgoing calls only Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Conference Unattended Call Transfer Screened to CO Line Limited Call Duration System Programming 4 109 503 4 7 COS Programming Call Transfer to CO Line Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Transfer to CO Line function e COS number 1 through 8 x all COS Enable Disable All COS Enable 1 Enter 503 Display Transfer to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Enable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Section 3 Features Call Transfe
251. ming References None Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Transfer Installation 2 55 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time Set the power switch to OFF Set the system clear switch to CLEAR Plug the AC power cord into the system and an AC outlet Turn the power switch on Press the Reset button with a pointed tool The power indicator will flash 6 Slide the system clear switch to NORMAL while the power indicator is flashing approximately within 10 seconds an amp Nw The system will be initialized with default values The system will also check the CO lines extensions and optional cards and units KX TD816 Reset Button System Clear Switch Q cat RESET NORMAL CLEAR a To AC Outlet Power Indicator Power Switch 2 56 Installation 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time KX TD1232 System Clear Switch E ES rE SYSTEM CLEAR CLEAR NORMAL l Pumaq Q ATOR RESET Reset Button j m gt To AC Outlet Power Indicator Power Switch Pumaq JU amp Bo ef o o
252. mr fe Connector _ Panasonic AC Inlet Power Switch Power Indicator Earth Terminal EIA RS 232C Connector Connector Battery Adaptor 5 AC Inlet Power Switch Power Indicator 2 4 Installation 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit Inside View of the Main Unit KX TD816 KX TD1232 Extension Modular Jacks CO Modular Jacks Fuse Front Cover Remote Card KX TD196 Door Opener and Doorphone Connectors Extension Connectors Paging Jack 2 Paging Jack 1 External Music Jack 2 External Music Jack 1 System Clear Switch Reset Button Front Cover Installation 2 5 2 2 Installation of the Main Unit 2 2 3 About the Remote Card KX TD196 The Remote Card is already inst
253. munication between the extension and the other end is protected from any signal such as Call Waiting Hold Recall Data equipment or a facsimile may be connected to an extension jack so that the user can perform data communications During the communication Data Line Security maintains secure data transmission against tones If one extension in a conversation has set Data Line Security it applies to the both extensions Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Data line security set cancel None DPT Features SLT Features Data Line Security Features 3 47 D 3 Features Dial Tone Distinctive Description Four types of dial tone patterns are available to give some information about features enabled on the telephone set Dial tone 1 Normal dial tone None of the features listed below are enabled Dial tone 2 Sounds when any one of the features below are set Absent Message Capability Background Music BGM for digital proprietary telephones only Call Forwarding Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Do Not Disturb DND Electronic Station Lockout Pickup Dialing Timed Reminder ls 1 q i Dial tone 3 Sounds when performing Account Code Entry Also sounds when answering Timed Reminder call 1s 1 1 1 1 1 1 lt lt pe 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 Conditions None Programming
254. n 5 Outgoing call restriction level Day mode Night mode 1 through 8 6 Restriction of outside call duration enable disable 7 The number of permitted dialing digits during an outside call 8 The ability to set Call Forwarding Follow Me enable disable Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit 503 Call Transfer to CO Line 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line 507 Do Not Disturb Override 508 Account Code Entry Mode 601 Class of Service 991 COS Additional Information Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION Check In Check Out Operation References Not applicable Features 3 39 C 3 Features Co Incoming Call Information Display Description Provides the display proprietary telephone user with the preset CO line name if an incoming outside call arrives at the telephone If the CO name is not assigned and the CO line is an ISDN SO line provided with CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation feature shows the caller s telephone number and name on the display Conditions e It is required to give names to CO lines by system programming e With the CLIP feature the ISDN SO line informs the system of the caller s telephone number only To display the name the system compares the informed number with the System Speed Dialing Numbers stored in progr
255. n Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the length of the hold recall timer This timer is used to alert an extension that a call has been held for an extended period of time Time seconds 0 through 240 O Hold Recall disabled 60 s 1 4 3 Enter 200 Display Hold Recall Time Press NEXT Display example Time 60 sec Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time Press STORE Press END e Select 0 if Hold Recall is not required e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Hold Recall 4 56 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings before the transfer recall occurs Ifa transferred call is not answered before the programmed time of rings the call returns to the original caller Number of rings 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 201 Display Transfer Recall 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension System Programming 4 57 202 4 4 Timer Programming Call Fo
256. n CO line number KX TD816 05 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines Enable Disable Default All CO lines Disable Programming 1 Enter 418 Display ISDN DDI 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Feature References Section 3 Features Direct Dialing In DDI System Programming 4 99 419 4 6 CO Line Programming CO Line Name Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to set names to CO lines The preset name is shown on a display proprietary telephone when an incoming outside call is placed to the telephone CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e Name 10 characters max All CO lines Not stored 1 Enter 4
257. n Single CO S CO Button Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing Basic Operation Making Calls If one party in a conversation goes on hook they are both disconnected from the speech path automatically This feature applies to extension and outside calls Reorder tone is sent to the off hook party before it is disconnected In the case of a single line telephone SLT if nothing is dialled within a certain period of time after the other party goes on hook reorder tone is sent to the SLT and then it is disconnected from the speech path Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features SLT Features Lockout Manager Extension Description Conditions One extension in the system can be assigned as the system manager This extension can perform system programming e Besides the manager extension the extension that is connected to the jack 1 is able to perform system programming e If eXtra Device Port mode is enabled at the manager extension the digital proprietary telephone user is regarded as the manager Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 3 82 Features 3 Features M Feature References Operation References Message Waiting Description Conditions None Not applicable The system suppo
258. n Assignment Section 3 Features Buttons on Digital Proprietary DSS Console KX T7240 Telephones Operation References Not applicable Button Group CO G CO Description Conditions To support efficient utilization of CO lines a group of CO lines CO line group can be assigned to a CO button The function is referred to as Group CO G CO The G CO button works in conjunction with the DIL 1 N feature Any incoming call from any CO line in the CO line group arrives at the G CO button To make an outside call the user can access an idle CO line in the group by simply pressing the dedicated G CO button e No G CO button is originally provided on a DPT It is programmable on a CO button by either system or station programming e It is needed to program the extension for receiving and or originating calls on CO lines e It is possible to assign the same CO line group to more than one G CO buttons on the same DPT e It is possible to assign the same line to an S CO button and to a G CO button e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line group basis e The DPT user can choose a desired ringer frequency for each G CO button by system or station programming Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 401 CO Line Group Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringi
259. n KX TD816 The models marked can be installed only in KX TD1232 The models marked supports the Pay Tone service of your Central Office In this Installation Manual the suffix AL of each model number is omitted The Digital Super Hybrid System is abbreviated as DSHS The Digital Proprietary Telephone is abbreviated as DPT A Single Line Telephone is abbreviated as SLT Important Information This equipment should be used on PSTN lines requiring 2 wire Loop calling unguarded clearing with Loop Disconnect or DTMF address signaling The equipment must be connected to direct extension lines and a payphone should not be connected as an extension Operation in Power Failure In the event of a power failure single line telephones SLTs will be directly connected to specific CO lines as follows KX TD816 CO 1 is connected to the extension jack 1 CO 2 is connected to the extension jack 2 CO 5 is connected to Power Failure Transfer jack KX TD1232 three SLTs can be connected to CO 1 CO 2 and CO 9 which are connected to Power Failure Transfer jacks e Set the Dialing Mode Tone or Pulse of your telephone according to the CO line e 114 and 000 can be dialed on the apparatus for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the emergency 114 and 000 service Satisfactory performance can not be guaranteed for every allowed combination of host and subsidiary apparatus 114 and 000 can be dialed on the apparatu
260. n page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one extension group press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Pickup Group Station Hunting Extension Group Voice Mail Integration Paging Group System Programming 4 117 603 604 4 8 Extension Programming DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Description A DIL 1 N line can be assigned to ring more than one extension All incoming calls from the programmed CO lines are directed to the specified extensions These programs assign the extensions and the notification method for each CO line in both day and night modes Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 x 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines e Disab disable Immdt immediate ringing 4RNG 4 ring delay 6RNG 6 rings delay 8RNG 8 rings delay No RNG no ring Default All jacks 1 2 all CO lines Immediate ringing Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program address 603 for day or 604 for night Display example DIL 1 N Asn Day 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack
261. nal 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180D or 8 CO Line Card KX TD181D must be installed to receive the pay tone e An optional 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 or 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 must be installed to receive pay message e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key in step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Section 3 Features HOTEL APPLICATION 4 107 1 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 500 501 4 7 COS Programming Toll Restriction Level Day Night Description Each extension must be assigned a Class of Service COS These programs set the toll restriction value for each COS in day or night mode Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Level number 1 through 8 Default All COS Level 1 Day Night Programming 1 Enter a program address 500 for day or 501 for night Display example TRS Level Day 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 1 4 Enter a level number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press
262. nces and electrical noise generating devices such as fluorescent lamps motors and televisions These noise sources can interfere with the performance of the Digital Super Hybrid System This unit should be kept free of dust moisture high temperature more than 40 C 104 F and vibration and should not be exposed to direct sunlight Never attempt to insert wires pins etc into the vents or other holes of this unit If there is any trouble disconnect the unit from the telephone line Plug the telephone directly into the telephone line If the telephone operates properly do not reconnect the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired If the telephone does not operate properly chances are that the trouble is in the telephone system and not in the unit Do not use benzine thinner or the like or any abrasive powder to clean the cabinet Wipe it with a soft cloth WARNING THIS UNIT MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED AND SERVED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL WHEN A FAILURE OCCURS WHICH RESULTS IN THE INTERNAL PARTS BECOMING ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY CORD IMMEDIATELY AND RETURN THIS UNIT TO YOUR DEALER DISCONNECT THE TELECOM CONNECTION BEFORE DISCONNECTING THE POWER CONNECTION PRIOR TO RELOCATING THE EQUIPMENT AND RECONNECT THE POWER FIRST THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH AN EARTHING CONTACT PLUG FOR SAFETY REASONS THIS PLUG MUST ONLY BE CONNECTED TO AN EARTHING CONTACT SOCKET WHICH HAS BEEN INSTALLED ACCORDIN
263. nd 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 Section 3 Features Direct Dialing In DDI System Programming 4 125 800 4 10 Resource Programming SMDR Incoming Outgoing Call Log Printout Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Used to determine which calls will produce an SMDR printout e Outgoing calls All all calls Toll toll calls only Off no printing e Incoming calls On all calls Off no printing Outgoing calls All Incoming calls On 1 Enter 800 Display Duration Log 2 Press NEXT to program outgoing calls Display Outgoing All 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program incoming calls Display Incoming On 6 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 7 Press STORE 8 Press END e It is necessary to connect a printer to the EIA RS 232C port provided on the system e After connecting a printer do not press the RETURN key if provided on the printer in 10 seconds Otherwise the usage of the EIA port is changed to system programming and printout will not occur e If Toll is selected the system will print out all the calls starting from the numbers stored in programs 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 Sec
264. ne Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 2 ISDN S0 Line Unit KX TD280 One of the following units can be installed per system KX TD180 Adds four CO lines KX TD180D Adds four CO lines which support the Pay Tone service of your Central Office KX TD185 Adds four DID lines KX TD280 Adds two ISDN SO lines miT Y SA L 4 CO lines 4 DID lines __4A CO lines 4 DID lines 2 ISDN SO lines can be added 2 ISDN SO lines can be added 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 KX TD181D 4 ISDN S0 Line Card KX TD281 One of the following cards can be installed for KX TD1232 KX TD181 Adds eight CO lines KX TD180D Adds four CO lines which support the Pay Tone service of your Central Office KX TD281 Adds four ISDN SO lines Ai E 8 CO lines 4 ISDN SO lines can be added o 1 6 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 14 Options System Inter Connection Card KX TD192 Permits two Digital Super Hybrid Systems to be connected together to double system capacity Connection Cable Doorphone Card KX TD1
265. ne and allows the extension user to dial the same number again Conditions e With a digital proprietary telephone REDIAL button is used to carry out Last Number Redial With a single line telephone the feature number is used e The memorized telephone number is replaced by a new one if at least one digit to be sent to a CO line is dialed Dialing a CO line access code alone does not change the memorized number e Certain types of proprietary telephones allow automatic multiple redialing Automatic Redial 3 98 Features 3 Features R Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Last number redial Section 3 Features Redial Automatic DPT Features SLT Features Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Description Conditions Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to save a telephone number and redial the number afterwards The user can store it while in conversation on a CO line The saved number can be redialed many times until another one is stored e Certain types of digital proprietary telephones DPT allow automatic multiple redialing Automatic Redial If the SAVE button is not provided on your DPT it is possible to assign a flexible button to be the SAVE button Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO
266. ng Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming cccccceecceseeteeeteeeeceteeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Features 3 17 B 3 Features Feature References Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Access Direct CO Line Group Ringing Delayed LED Indication CO Line Ringing Tone Selection for CO Line Access CO Line Group Buttons Operation References DPT Features User Manual Answering Direct CO Line Outward Dialing Line Access CO Line Group Button Loop CO L CO Description All CO lines can be assigned to a flexible CO button on a digital proprietary telephone DPT The assigned button serves as a Loop CO L CO button An incoming call on any CO line arrives at the L CO unless there are S CO or G CO buttons associated with the line or unless the button is already in use To make an outside call the DPT user can simply press the dedicated L CO button Conditions e No L CO button is originally provided on a DPT A flexible CO button can be assigned as an L CO button in either system or station programming e It is possible to assign more than one L CO button on a DPT e Pressing the L CO button provides the same operation as dialing the automatic line access code This results in Automatic Line Access or Automatic Route Selection ARS if programmed e
267. ng Numbers can be assigned to flexible buttons on DPT and DSS Console When a display telephone user makes a call to the telephone number that is set to Secret Dialing all or part of the number does not appear on the display Additionally KX T7235 model telephones are capable of Secret Dialing for Station Speed Dialing numbers Conditions e When storing a number press the INTERCOM button at the beginning and the end of the number to be concealed e You can conceal one or more parts of a telephone number e The concealed part will be printed out by SMDR Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features One Touch Dialing System Speed Dialing Special Display Features for KX T7235 Station Speed Dialing 3 102 Features 3 Features S Operation References DPT Features User Manual Secret Dialing Special Display Features for KX T7235 The KX T7235 is provided with a large display that allows the user to originate calls or to access system facilities with ease The display prompts the user with information related to the desired feature Examples of this special function are shown below CO Outgoing Call Log Extension Dialing Station Speed Dialing System Feature Access Menu System Speed Dialing CO Outgoing Call Log Description Provides a display of the last dialed telephone numbers and allows the user to perform redialing the number by pressing the associated button Con
268. ng References Common Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel Message waiting set cancel callback 113 VM Status DTMF Set 114 VM Command DTMF Set 407 408 DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 609 Voice Mail Access Codes 990 System Additional Information Fields 6 through 9 18 Station Programming 00ccccceccceeceessecesseeeeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment MESSAGE Button Voice Mail VM Transfer Button For VM Service Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Voice Mail Hunting 990 System Additional Information Field 10 For AA Service Section 4 System Programming 106 Station Hunting Type Select Automated Attendant Hunting 990 System Additional Information Field 24 Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding All Calls Call Forwarding No Answer Call Forwarding Busy Intercept Routing Call Forwarding Busy No Station Hunting Answer 3 130 Features 3 Features V Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Voice Mail Integration Voice Mail Transfer Volume Control Speaker Handset Receiver Headset Ringer Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to
269. ning of the number e An optional 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 must be installed for this feature e If the destination is in Do Not Disturb mode 1 if IRNA is employed the call is sent to the IRNA destination 2 if IRNA is not employed the system sends the busy tone Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 KX TD185 KX TD280 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type 401 CO Line Group Assignment 430 DID Table Number Assignment 431 DID Incoming Assignment 432 DID Outgoing Assignment 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed Digit and Received Digit 434 DID Added Number 435 DID Wink Time Out Assignment 3 52 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features D Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Display Call Information Description The display proprietary telephone shows the user the following call information Extension number and name These are shown when calling or when called by an extension user and during an established intercom call A display example 123 Smith Dialed telephone number This is shown when dialing the telephone number A display example 91234567890 Number or name of the caller These are shown when receiving an incoming outside call on ISDN network A display example 0712225555 JOHN WHITE CO line number and name This is shown when receiving
270. nnected Time minutes 1 through 64 10 min 1 Enter 205 Display CO Dur Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e This time out applies to extensions to which Limited Call Duration is assigned by program 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit e This time cannot be set to zero or be left empty Section 3 Features Limited Call Duration System Programming 4 61 206 4 4 Timer Programming CO to CO Call Duration Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed for a conversation between two outside parties When the timer expires the CO to CO call is disconnected Time minutes 1 through 64 10 min 1 4 3 Enter 206 Display CO CO Dur Time Press NEXT Display example Time 10 min Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time Press STORE Press END You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line Call Transfer Screened to CO Line 4 62 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 207 First Digit Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the first digit dialed
271. ns Feature References Assigns received digits of DID subscriber number to each DID table Besides removed digits from the received digits can be programmed In this case digits are removed from the beginning of the received digits e DID table number 1 through 4 e Number of digits to be deleted RMV 0 through 6 O no deleting e Number of digits to be received RCV 1 through 7 e All DID tables RMV 0 e DID table 1 RCV 1 other DID tables RCV 3 1 Enter 433 Display DID RMV RCV Dial 2 Press NEXT Display DID Table NO gt 3 Enter a DID table number To enter DID table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 RMV 1 RCV 2 4 Enter the number of digits to be deleted or received To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another DID table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID System Programming 4 105 434 4 6 CO Line Programming DID Added Number Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns added number to the DID subscriber number which is determined in program 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed Digit and Received Digit to make the final number which serves as the extension number Note that digits are inserte
272. nsion Card Unit Type e KX TD816 C E e KX TD1232 Master and Slave C C E1 E2 5 4 List 5 2 Default Values Address Program Default 113 VM Status DTMF Set RBT 1 BT 2 ROT 3 DND 4 Answer 5 Disconnect 9 Confirm 9 FWD VM RBT 6 FWD VM BT 7 FWD EXT RBT 8 114 VM Command DTMF Set LV MSG H GETMSG H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 115 Adjust Time 1 00 am 116 ROM Version Display Not Applicable 117 Charge Display Selection AS 118 Charge Verification Assignment Enable 119 Charge Verification ID Code Set 1234 120 User Password 1234 121 Hotel Application Disable Timer Programming 200 Hold Recall Time 60 s SEO EI Tranter Recall Time rigs 202 _ Call Forwarding No Answer Time 3 rings 203 Intercept Time 12 rings 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time ls 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration 10 min Time 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time 10 min 207 First Digit Time 10s 208 Inter Digit Time 10s 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 4 times 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time 120 s 211 Dial Start Time 0 ms 212 Call Duration Count Start Time Os 213 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 10 min TRS ARS Programming 300 TRS Override for System Speed Disable Dialing 301 305 TRS Denied Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Not Stored Levels 2 through 6 31
273. nter an exceptional number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number Press STORE To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END There is a maximum of five numbers for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character Section 3 Features Toll Restriction 4 72 System Programming 4 5 TRS ARS Programming 311 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Emergency Dial Set Stores up to 10 emergency call numbers Emergency numbers are not subject to toll restriction Account Code Verified mode or Electronic Station Lockout e Location number 01 through 10 e Emergency number 3 digits max Location 01 114 Location 02 000 1 Enter 311 Display Emergency Dial 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt 3 Enter a location number To enter location number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example 01 114 4 Enter an emergency number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another location press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired location number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END
274. number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 COS1 COS1 4 Enter a primary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 5 Press m 6 Enter a secondary COS number To change the current entry enter the new number 7 Press STORE 8 To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 9 Repeat steps 4 through 8 10 Press END System Programming 4 115 601 Conditions Feature References 4 8 Extension Programming Class of Service contd e There is a maximum of eight Classes of Services Every extension must be assigned to a Class of Service and is subject to the COS Programming of programs 500 through 508 and 991 e A secondary COS number can be assigned per extension only for Check In Check Out feature To program other extensions you need only to enter a primary number e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number on page 4 7 e To assign all jacks to one COS press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for Jack 01 Section 3 Features Class of Service COS 4 116 Sys
275. ode Selection e Day of the week selection number 1 Sunday 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6 Friday 7 Saturday every day of the week Hour 1 through 12 Disable no switching e Minute 0 through 59 AM PM Default Every day of the week Day 9 00 AM Night 5 00 PM Programming 1 Enter 102 Display Day Night Time 2 Press NEXT Display Day of Week gt 3 Enter the day of the week selection number To select Sunday you can also press NEXT Display example Sun Day 9 00 AM To select night mode press NEXT Display example Sun Nig 5 00 PM 4 Enter the hour To set no switching keep pressing SELECT until Disable is displayed and go to step 9 If SELECT is pressed the display shows the previous entry If the previous setting was Disable press SELECT to enter the starting time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 5 Press gt 6 Enter the minute To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new minutes 7 Press mm System Programming 4 37 102 4 3 System Programming Day Night Service Starting Time contd 8 Press SELECT for AM or PM 9 Press STORE 10 To program another day night mode or day of the week press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the day of the week selection number 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 12 Press END Conditions e To select the desired day you m
276. ogrammed for CO01 e You may disable CPC Signal Detection for a CO line e Program 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set is used to program CPC Signal Detection for outgoing outside calls 4 86 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set contd Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection CPC Signal Detection Time Table Entry Time ms Entry Time ms Entry Time ms 216 52 416 224 53 424 232 54 432 240 55 440 248 56 448 256 57 456 264 58 464 272 59 472 280 60 480 288 61 488 296 62 496 304 63 504 312 64 512 320 65 520 328 66 528 336 67 536 344 68 544 352 69 552 360 70 560 368 71 568 376 72 576 23 184 48 384 73 584 24 192 49 392 74 592 25 200 50 400 75 600 26 208 51 408 System Programming 4 87 407 408 4 6 CO Line Programming DIL 1 1 Extension Day Night Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References The Direct In Lines DIL 1 1 feature allows incoming outside calls to be directed to a specific extension When a CO line is assigned as DIL 1 1 it is necessary to assign the destination These programs specify the extension number for day or night mode e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 X all CO lines
277. ollowing digits Automatic Pause Insertion Program the pause time required by the Host PBX for that CO line group e Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible External Feature Access Programming References Section 4 System Programming 411 Host PBX Access Codes 412 Pause Time Feature References Section 3 Features External Feature Access Pause Insertion Automatic Operation References Not applicable HOTEL APPLICATION Description Allows the operator to handle the front operator services such as check in check out timed reminder wake up call This operation is applicable to only the operator extension with a KX T7235 Check In Check Out Description Allows the operator to operate the check in check out service This feature can control the usage of an outside call by switching the Class of Service between primary and secondary and count and print out the telephone charge and the other charges such as mini bar charges Conditions e Hotel application must be enabled by System Programming e When the check in is assigned the Class of Service is set to the primary one and the charge counter will be cleared When the check out is assigned the Class of Service is set to secondary one and the total telephone charge and the other charge will be displayed and printed out e The telephone charge can be added to the surcharge according to the pre assigned margin rate Features 3 71 A 3 F
278. on Description Adds the following programming items if required Area 1 There are 10 fields available in Area 1 as follows Display meme OOLO1L100011000101 Jbl 4 4 LL 4 Lid Field number 10 9 8 D 6 5 4 reserved 3 2 1 Area 2 There are 13 fields available in Area 2 as follows Display 1110011001101100 example 4 44 bbb bbiubddvd Field number unused 26 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 I5 14 13 12 1 Area 3 KX TD816 1 through 8 below match CO lines 1 through 8 KX TD1232 1 through 16 below match CO lines 1 through 16 Display example oooooooooooooooo bhlibdb bli lib dv bidd CO number 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Field number 23 Area 4 KX TD1232 17 through 24 below match CO lines 17 through 24 Display a 1111111100000000 sb aks ale oe ale dl ab ob CO number 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 J bake ab ab Field number reserved 27 t8sa 25 24 23 4 138 System Programming CO numbers 9 through 24 in the field number 23 are available for KX TD1232 only 4 11 Option Programming 990 System Additional Information conta Area 5 There is 1 field available in Area 5 as follows Display ee Mit ett be ae ab Field number unused reserved 30 reserved Explanation for Areas 1 through 5 Field Description Selection Def
279. on Allows the extension user to restrict the presentation of the calling party s number to the called party when making a call This is one of the ISDN services Conditions If the presentation is enabled the called party can check the calling party s number before the called party is answered it Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Programming References Section 4 System Programming 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment 417 ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 30 Features 3 Features C Call Park Description Conditions Allows the extension user to place a held call into a system parking area This releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved from any other extension user e The system contains 10 parking areas each of which has its own call park number Up to 10 calls can be parked at the same time in the system Under the System Connection all users may access the same call parking area The number of holding slots remains at 10 e If a parked call is not retrieved in a specific period of time Transfer Recall starts e If a parked call is not retrieved in 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected e Confirmation tone is sent to the user when the parked call is retrieved Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation Refer
280. on Line Unit 1 and which is 2 by system programming e If a telephone or answering machine with an A A1 relay is connected to the main unit set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone or answering machine to OFF position Digital Proprietary Telephone Connection With the KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 and KX T7250 model digital proprietary telephones 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins L and H only A and B are only needed for Paralleled Telephone or XDP operation Single Line Telephone Connection With the single line telephones 2 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins A and B DSS Console Connection A maximum of four DSS Consoles model KX T7240 can be installed per system The DSS Console must be connected in parallel with any proprietary telephone System Programming is required to designate paired jack numbers of DSS Consoles and proprietary telephones With the KX T7240 model DSS Console 4 conductor wiring is required for each extension Connect pins L and H only A and B are not necessary Station Wiring 3 pair twisted cabling 50 Pin Connector Block Terminal OO 1 1 Green Line cord 2 _ 2 hes Black 3 3 Yellow 4 4 White 5 5 Blue 6 6 B
281. optional 8 CO Line Card KX TD181 KX TD181D To connect four ISDN SO lines to KX TD1232 install the optional 4 ISDN SO Line Card KX TD281 1 Insert the upper end of the 8 CO Line Card or 4 ISDN SO Line Card into the two hooks on the main unit 2 Press the two corners at the lower end of the Card 3 Fix the card with an accessary screw at the lower right corner 4 Connect the cord to the connector 4 ISDN SO Line Card 8 CO Line Card cr O o pi fe j h wal I N NS AN ON ON a N ojele here 4 pin Connector x4 4 pin Connector X 1 on the lower board In making a CO line connection use twisted pair cable for installation The wire specifications for CO lines are as follows Wire Solid wire Diameter of conductor 0 4 0 65 mm Diameter including coating 0 66 1 05 mm e In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead of system default setting e System Programming is required for location identification Refer to Section 4 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Default 8 CO Line Card 2 32 Installation 2 4 2 CO Line Connection kx 101232 CO1 through CO8 8 CO Line Connection with KX TD181 KX TD181
282. ough 6 8 Press END 1 Perform the same procedures as steps through 4 above 2 Enter 2 3 Press STORE 4 Press END e A centralized telephone is a telephone connected to jack 01 or a jack programmed as a manager extension in program 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment e There is a maximum of 16 proprietary telephones for KX TD816 and 64 proprietary telephones for KX TD1232 e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available Jack numbers in the out of service system are unacceptable e The number of the CO buttons available depends on the telephone type Refer to Section 3 Buttons on Digital Proprietary Telephones To program 24 CO buttons use the digital proprietary telephone KX T7230 If you press the same CO button again at step 5 you can select a desired ringer frequency for the CO button from eight types of ring tone When you enter the tone type number 1 through 8 you will hear the selected tone type until STORE is pressed This selection is possible only for the CO buttons that have been assigned to Single CO Group CO or Loop CO Section 3 Features Button Flexible Buttons on Digital Proprietary Telephones System Programming 4 25 006 4 2 Manager Programming Operator Manager Extension Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns
283. ound the shields If cables are run on the floor use protectors or the like to protect 2 2 Installation 2 1 Before Installation the wires where they may be stepped on Avoid wiring under carpets Avoid using the same power supply outlet for computers telexes and other office equipment Otherwise the system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such equipment Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of telephone equipment such as single line telephones data terminals answering machines computers voice processing systems etc except proprietary telephones KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 etc The Power Switch of the system must be off during wiring After all the wirings are completed turn the Power Switch on Mis wiring may cause the system to operate improperly Refer to Section 6 1 1 Installation and Section 6 1 2 Connection If an extension does not operate properly disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then connect again or turn off the Power Switch of the system and then on again The system is equipped with a 3 wire grounding type plug This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug Use twisted pair cable for CO line connection CO lines should be installe
284. oute Selection ARS is set it is overridden by an outgoing call made by pressing the S CO button e Incoming calls appear on the digital proprietary telephone when an extension is assigned as the incoming call destination and an S CO G CO and or L CO button is assigned e Immediate delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable can be selected on an extension CO line group basis e The DPT user can choose a desired ringing tone type for the S CO button by system or station programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 ccceccceecceseeceeeteeeeenteeneeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Single CO S CO Button Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Section 3 Features Answering Direct CO Line Line Access Individual LED Indication CO Line Ringing Delayed Line Access Direct Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Basic Operation Making Calls DPT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Individual Features 3 19 B 3 Features Buttons on Digital Proprietary Telephones Description Digital proprietary telephones are provided with the feature line access buttons listed bel
285. ow Digital Proprietary Telephones KX T Buttons 7220 7230 7235 7250 AUTO ANSWER MUTET vY Vv Y AUTO DIAL STORE Y Y Vv Vv CO Y 24 e 24 12 6 CONF f Y Y Y Function Y 10 FWD DND Y Y Y HOLD Y Y Y Y INTERCOM t Y Y Y Y MESSAGE Y Vv Y MONITOR Vv PAUSE Y Y PROGRAM Y Vv Y Y RECALL Y Y Y Y REDIAL Y Vv Y Y SHIFT Y Y Soft V3 W 3 SP PHONE 7 Y Y Y TRANSFER Y Vv Y Y VOLUME Y Y Y Y The button is provided on the designated telephones The button is provided with an LED Light Emitting Diode The buttons which can be changed to function as a feature button are called flexible buttons The button is provided without an LED x Shows the number of buttons only if multiple buttons are provided e The functions of the listed buttons are described below AUTO ANSWER MUTE This dual function button is used for extension auto answer and microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL STORE Used for System Speed Dialing and storing program changes CO Central Office line Can be re assigned to a different CO or to various feature buttons CONF Conference Used to establish a three party conference Function Used to perform the displayed function operation 3 20 Features 3 Features B Conditions FWD DND Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb Used to program Call Forwarding set Do Not Distur
286. owing items programmed on the telephone to default setting Programming Items Default Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Tone 1 Full One Touch Dialing Assignment On Handset Headset Selection Handset Intercom Alerting Assignment Tone Call Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Ringing Line Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing Intercom Line Station programming is used to set or cancel these items at individual telephones Conditions None Programming References Station Programming cceccceccceseeneeeneeeeeeteeeaeees User Manual Station Programming Data Default Set Feature References Section 3 Features Station Programming Operation References Not applicable 3 110 Features 3 Features S Station Speed Dialing Description Conditions Allows an extension user to store frequently dialed numbers in order to place a call with abbreviated dialing It is performed by dialing the feature number and a speed dial number from 0 through 9 Up to 10 numbers can be stored for each telephone e Station Speed Dialing can be followed by manual dialing to supplement the dialed digits e You may make a call with One Touch Dialing button instead of Station Speed Dialing e The single line telephone SLT may be replaced to a digital proprietary telephone DPT temporarily to store one touch dialing into memory The Function Buttons F1 through F10 are corresponded to speed dial numbers as follows Fl 0 F6
287. pened lu r o e Notes If two or three expansion units are installed cut the cabinet covers on the lower cabinets to allow the cords from the upper cabinet to go down through the cabinet covers To protect the cords smooth the cut edges Cut here Programming References Section 4 System Programming 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features Module Expansion 2 42 Installation 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection A maximum of two doorphones KX T30865 and two door openers user supplied is permitted A Doorphone Card KX TD160 is required for KX TD816 Installing the Doorphone Doorphone Card Installation 1 Loosen the screw to separate the 1 Connect a 4 conductor modular connector doorphone into two halves to the Doorphone Card Cabinet and pass the cord through the groove on the cabinet SCrew 2 Install the base cover to the wall with two screws 2 Attach the Doorphone Card Cabinet to the main unit and press it down 3 Connect the cord to the Doorphone Card Note Two kinds of screws are included Connector Please choose an appropriate one depending on your wall type sais Type 1 When t
288. pener 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features Doorphone Call DPT Features SLT Features Doorphone Call Your system supports two doorphones If a visitor presses the doorphone button pre assigned extensions are rung The extension who answers the call can talk to the visitor It is possible for any extension user to originate a call to a doorphone e It is needed to install an optional Doorphone e Two doorphones can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four doorphones e It is necessary to program the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone during day and night mode e If no extension user answers an incoming doorphone call within 30 seconds the call stops ringing and is cancelled e While engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in Door Opener This requires a user supplied door opener 3 58 Features 3 Features D Connection References Section 2 Installation 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Doorphone call 607 608 Doorphone Ringing Assignment Day Night Section 3 Features Door Opener DPT Features SLT Features Doorphone Call DsS Console KX T7240 Description The Direct Station Selection DSS Consol
289. ption Conditions Permits the pre assigned extension user to call another user who sets the Do Not Disturb feature Dialing 2 enables the caller to override the DND programmed on the called extension s telephone and causes the telephone to ring Class of Service COS programming determines the extension users who can perform DND Override Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 507 Do Not Disturb Override Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND DPT Features SLT Features Do Not Disturb DND Override Features 3 57 D Door Opener Description Conditions Connection References 3 Features Allows the extension users to unlock the door for a visitor from their telephones The door can be unlocked by extension users who have been programmed to receive doorphone calls However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can open the door from the telephone to let the visitor in It is needed to install a user supplied door opener on each door to be opened Two door openers can be installed on each system System Connection provides for four door openers Section 2 Installation 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Doorphone Call Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Door o
290. r Screened to CO Line 4 110 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 504 Call Forwarding to CO Line Description This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform the Call Forwarding to CO Line function Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Disable Enable Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 504 Display Call FWD to CO 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Feature References Section 3 Features Call Forwarding to CO Line System Programming 4 111 507 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References 4 7 COS Programming Do Not Disturb Override This program determines which Classes of Services COS are allowed to perform Do Not Disturb DND Override e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Disable Enable All COS Disable 1 Enter 507 Disp
291. r when the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set this line takes precedence e Incoming TAFAS calls can be identified by ringing signals sent out from external pagers The ringing pattern is the same as the outside calls e The DPT user can select a desired tone frequency for each CO button Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Operation References Not applicable Features 3 101 R S 3 Features Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select the desired ringer frequency for each CO button This provides discrimination of incoming outside calls Conditions There are eight ringer frequencies available One of them can be assigned to a CO button that is assigned as each of the following buttons Single CO Group CO or Loop CO button It is not possible to assign a ringer frequency to any other button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment Station Programming ccccccesceeeeeeeeeeseeneenaeens User Manual Ringing Tone Selection for CO Buttons Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Secret Dialing Description Allows an extension user to conceal all or part of a registered telephone number that normally appears on the display during System Speed Dialing or One Touch Diali
292. r 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e Some central offices CO may send CPC like signals during the dialing sequence and an attempt to make a call may be terminated If your CO is such a type select Disable e CPC Signal Detection is effective only with the 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 KX TD816 CO05 through CO08 KX TD1232 CO09 through CO12 Master CO21 through CO24 Slave In this case D 4DID must be selected in program 109 Expansion Card Unit Type System Programming 4 95 415 4 6 CO Line Programming CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set conta e Program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set is used to set CPC Signal Detection Time e To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO01 Feature References Section 3 Features Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 4 96 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 416 ISDN Line Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line Your telephone number is informed to t
293. r Manual Charge Fee Reference Flexible Button Assignment Account Button Section 3 Features Charge Fee Reference Toll Restriction Override by Account Code Entry Features 3 3 A Operation References User Manual 3 Features DPT Features SLT Features Account Code Entry Alternate Calling Ring Voice Description Conditions This system offers two methods of Intercom Calling Ring Calling and Voice Calling Ring Calling informs the called party of an incoming call with a ring tone while the Voice Calling uses the calling party s voice The called extension user if a proprietary telephone can select tone or voice calling If the user selects Voice Calling the calling party can talk to the user immediately after confirmation tone The calling extension user is able to change the calling method pre selected once at a time by the called extension by pressing Ring Calling can be switched to Voice Calling and vice versa This operation is available for both proprietary and single line telephone users during calling Single line telephone users receive calls with Ring Calling only Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Station Programming ccceceecceseeeceeeteeeeenteenaeees User Manual Intercom Alerting Assignment Section 3 Features Handsfree Answerback DPT Features SLT Features Alternate Calling Ring Voice Answe
294. r Manual Hotel Application 3 72 Features 3 Features I Intercept Routing Description Conditions Provides automatic redirection of incoming outside calls There are two types of Intercept Routing In the first case a call cannot be placed on the called party This is called Rerouting In the second case the call is not answered within a programmed time period This is called Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA e Intercept Routing applies to DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N TAFAS Call Forwarding and Station Hunting e The final destination of intercepted calls must be programmed for day and for night modes There are three possible destinations 1 an extension 2 an external pager e If the destination is in Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb does not function and the call is placed there Programming References Feature References Operation References Intercom Calling Description Conditions Section 4 System Programming 203 Intercept Time 409 410 Intercept Extension Day Night None Not applicable Allows the extension user to call another extension user within the system e Extension numbers are assigned to all extensions by system programming An extension number is programmed to be two three or four digits e Names can be given to extension numbers by system programming An extension number and a name if programmed is shown on the display DPT during an intercom call e DSS buttons permit one touc
295. r a CO line group number To program CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 2 0sec 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired time is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The disconnect time must be longer than the requirements of the central office or the host PBX e To assign all CO line groups to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for CO line group 1 e Program 401 CO Line Group Assignment is used to assign each CO line to a CO line group Section 3 Features Recall 4 94 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 415 CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set Description Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between the originated outside call and the established outside call If this is enabled the system disconnects the line with the time set in program 405 CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set when CPC Signal is detected Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 all CO lines Enable detection Disable no detection Default Disable Programming 1 Enter 415 Display CPC Outgoing Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line numbe
296. ransfer Connection Programming References No programming required Feature References Section 3 Features Power Failure Restart Operation References Not applicable Pulse to Tone Conversion Description This feature allows the extension user to change from pulse dial to tone DTMF dial so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance service 3 96 Features 3 Features R Conditions e This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse Dialing mode or Call Blocking mode e Dial Type Selection provides selection of a dial mode for each CO line e Changing tone to pulse is not possible Programming References Section 4 System Programming 402 Dial Mode Selection Feature References Section 3 Features Dial Type Selection Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Pulse to Tone Conversion Recall Description The RECALL button is used to allow a digital proprietary telephone user to disconnect from the current call and originate another call without hanging up first Conditions e By default setting pressing RECALL button with a digital proprietary telephone works as External Feature Access By changing the programmed data it works as Recall disconnection e Pressing the RECALL button re starts the conversation duration outputs an SMDR record inserts the automatic pause and checks toll restriction level again e It is required to enable this function at th
297. res Fixed Feature Numbers Feature Default While busy tone is heard Busy Station Signaling BSS 2 Off Hook Call Announcement OHCA 2 Automatic Callback Busy 6 While Do Not Disturb tone is heard Do Not Disturb Override 2 While calling or talking Conference 3 Door Open 5 Alternate Calling Ring Voice x Pulse to Tone Conversion xX Account Code Delimiter 99 When the set is on hook Background music on off 1 Time display date display switching x Day night mode display Conditions e Flexible feature numbers can only be dialed during dial tone e The following are examples of feature number conflicts Examples 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc e Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 003 Extension Number Set 100 Flexible Numbering Feature References None Operation References Not applicable 3 66 Features 3 Features F Floating Station Description Conditions You can assign virtual extension numbers for resources to make them appear to be extensions These numbers are defined as floating numbers FN The following resources can have floating numbers 1 External paging instrumen
298. res User Manual Call Transfer to Extension Call Transfer Unscreened to Extension Description Allows the user to transfer an intercom or outside call to directly transfer to an extension party After dialing the destination extension the user replaces the handset while hearing ringback tone Conditions e If the destination party does not answer within the transfer recall time the call will return to the user or Operator 1 You can select the desired one by system programming e This function is possible when the destination is sending ringback or busy tone If the destination is busy Camp On Transfer occurs e The ringing signal pattern follows the regular ringing pattern depending on the party being transferred outside or intercom call ringing e It is possible for any extension user to transfer a call to the floating modem e If music on hold is enabled music is sent to the caller while being transferred It is system programmable whether to send ringback tone or music on hold to the caller by program 990 Field 1 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 201 Transfer Recall Time 990 System Additional Information Fields 1 11 Feature References None 3 36 Features Available for KX TD1232 only 3 Features C Operation References User Manual Call Waiting Description Conditions Tone 1 Intercom Tone 2 CO DPT Features SLT Features Call Transfer to Exten
299. ridging Clips Installation 2 17 2 3 3 Extension Connection for Digital Proprietary Telephones Single Line Telephones and DSS Console KX TD816 Jack 1 through Jack 8 KX TD1232 Jack 1 through Jack 16 Programming References Section 4 System Programming 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment 109 Expansion Card Unit Type Feature References Section 3 Features DSS Console KX T7240 Module Expansion After completing all the required inside cabling including CO lines extensions external pagers and external music sources fasten the cables with the nylon tie included as shown 2 18 Installation 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Single Line Telephone Any single line telephone can be connected in parallel with a digital proprietary telephone as follows Method 1 Using a Modular T Adaptor Modular T Adaptor Panasonic KX J66 or USOC RJA2X A 2 conductor wiring cord t Connect pins A and B 4 conductor wiring cord Connect pins L and H only A and B are not necessary Digital Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone DPT KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Note The KX TD 12372 is illustrated as a main unit Installation 2 19 2 3 4 Paralleled Telephone Connection for a Digital Proprietary Telephone and a Sin
300. ring Direct CO Line Description Conditions Allows the proprietary telephone user to answer an incoming call by simply pressing the appropriate CO button without lifting the handset or pressing the SP PHONE MONITOR button This feature permits the user to specify the desired line to be answered if multiple incoming lines are ringing Programming References No programming required 3 4 Features 3 Features Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 3 Features CO Line Connection Assignment DPT Features Answering Direct CO Line Automatic Callback Busy Camp On Description Conditions Allows the caller to be informed when the called party has completed the current call Automatic Callback Extension If the caller answers the callback ringing the called extension automatically starts ringing again Automatic Callback CO Line If the caller answers the callback ringing the line is automatically selected to allow the user to make an outside call e Off hook prior to the start of callback ringing cancels this function If the callback ringing is not answered in four rings within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled e More than one extension user can set this function to one extension or CO line at the same time Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual No programming required None DPT Features SLT Features Automatic
301. rogram Master System To program Slave press NEXT again Display example Mast C C E1 E2 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press m gt Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the required entries are completed System Programming 4 43 109 4 3 System Programming Expansion Card Unit Type conta Conditions Feature References 7 Press STORE If only one system is in operation go to step 8 8 Press NEXT to program Slave System Display example Slave C C E1 E2 9 Repeat steps 3 and 7 10 Press END e In case of starting the system for the first time or System Data Clear the application for location will adapt the practical installation instead of system default setting There are two expansion areas in KX TD816 areas 1 and 2 from bottom to top For KX TD1232 there is one expansion area inside the system area 1 and there are three expansion area on the system area 2 3 and 4 from bottom to top If the Slave System of KX TD1232 is out of service skip the steps 8 and 9 After changing the setting to make your setting effective unplug the system once and plug it in again Otherwise the previous setting will be maintained Section 3 Features Module Expansion 4 44 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 113 VM Status DTMF Set Description Selection
302. rts the ability to inform the called party of a message waiting The user with a MESSAGE button knows there is a message if the LED of the MESSAGE button is lit red If the button is not provided nor assigned the called party hears special dial tone when he she goes off hook Pressing the lit MESSAGE button also means to call back the called party or listen to the messages which are stored in the mailbox of the Voice Processing System e For the digital proprietary telephone which is provided with no MESSAGE button a flexible CO button can be assigned as the MESSAGE button either by system or station programming e Cancelling the message can be performed from the extension setting it or from the extension receiving it e The system supports a maximum of 128 simultaneous messages e Messages are always left on the original extension It is not sent to a Call Forwarding or Station Hunting destination e A single line telephone user will hear the ring tone as a notification if he she receives a message It is programmable to set the interval of a ring tone by system programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Message waiting set cancel callback 213 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time 990 System Additional Information Field 9 Station Programming 0 cceccceecceeeeee
303. rwarding No Answer Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for the Call Forwarding No Answer feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is forwarded to the destination Number of rings 1 through 12 3 rings 1 Enter 202 Display No Answer Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 3 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to five seconds e This timer is also used for Intercept Routing e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Call Forwarding Busy No Answer Call Forwarding No Answer 4 58 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 203 Intercept Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the number of rings for the Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA feature If a call is not answered before the programmed number of rings the call is redirected to the programmed station Number of rings 3 through 48 12 rings 1 Enter 203 Display Intercept Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 12 rings 3 Enter the number of rings To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of rings 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e One ring is equivalent to f
304. s END Conditions e The timer starts counting after all the digits are dialed This timer is not applied to incoming calls The timer for incoming calls starts immediately e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Display Call Information Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 68 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 213 Message Waiting Ring Interval Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Set the interval time of Message Waiting ring for a single line telephone Time minutes 0 through 64 10 min 1 4 5 Enter 213 Display MW Ring Time Press NEXT Display example Interval 10 min Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and enter the new time Press STORE Press END When the internal time is set to 0 the telephone does not ring for Message Waiting notification Section 3 Features Message Waiting System Programming 4 69 300 4 5 TRS ARS Programming TRS Override for System Speed Dialing Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Allows you to enable toll restriction override for System Speed Dial Numbers If this is enabled all extension users can make System Speed Dialing calls with no restriction Enable Disable Disable 1 4 3 Enter 300 Display SPD Override Press NEXT
305. s after accessing the CO line for the purpose of making outgoing calls to the emergency 114 and 000 service During dialing this apparatus may tinkle the bells of other telephones using the same line This is not a fault and we advise you not to call Fault Repair Service Prevention of access by user This apparatus is intended to be accessible only to authorized personnel This apparatus must be installed in a locked room or similar environment such that user access is prevented Failure to prevent such user access will invalidate any approval given to this apparatus Caution Do not push the PAUSE button more than twice following the initial access digit or digits Failure to comply with this requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation Note No External TRC Terminal is provided due to an Internal Link between PE and TRC CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Attention e The apparatus is designed to be installed and operated under controlled conditions of ambient temperature and a relative humidity not greater than 60 e Avoid installing the apparatus in damp or humid environments such as bathrooms or swimming pools e The apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing e Keep the unit away from heating applia
306. s is checked against the selected Excepted Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five system programs for these tables 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 each programming is used to make up an Excepted Code Table for Levels 2 through 6 Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as excepted codes Each table can store up to five excepted codes each of which consisting of seven digits Applicable Denied and Excepted Code Tables depend on the assigned toll restriction level of an extension as follows Denied Code Tables Excepted Code Tables Level 1 None None Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 to 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 to 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 to 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 None None Level 8 None None Explanation Level 1 allows all calls Level 2 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Excepted Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 denies the codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels
307. s is displayed Display example RBT 21 System Programming 4 45 113 4 3 System Programming VM Status DTMF Set conta 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A DTMF signal number can have a maximum of three digits consisting of 0 through 9 and PAUSE e The DTMF signals are sent to the extensions in the extension group that is assigned as VM or AA in program 106 Station Hunting Type Feature References Section 3 Features Voice Mail Integration 4 46 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 114 VM Command DTMF Set Description Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice Processing System VPS There are four commands available Leave Message Get Message Automated Attendant Service Voice Mail Service These commands are used in the following ways A If your VPS is used for Voice Mail VM Service 1 Call Forwarding Intercept Routing to Voice Mail If a call is forwarded to the VPS your system will send a mailbox number to the VM port This allows the caller to leave a message without knowing the mailbox number e Required entries selections LV MSG Leave Message This command is
308. s to handle the front and operator service such as check in check out and wake up call setting System Outline 1 3 1 2 Basic System Construction The KX TD816 Digital Super Hybrid System has a basic capacity of 4 CO lines and 8 extensions and KX TD1232 has 16 extensions It is capable of supporting Panasonic digital proprietary telephones DSS Consoles and single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles To expand its capabilities the system can be equipped with optional components or customer supplied peripherals such as external speakers and external music sources e g radios 1 4 System Outline 1 3 Digital Proprietary Telephones The following Panasonic digital proprietary telephones are available with this system Proprietary Telephone KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 Description Speakerphone 24 CO Display speakerphone 24 CO Large display speakerphone 12 CO Monitor 6 CO Note CO CO line access button System Outline 1 5 14 Options 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 Each unit adds eight extensions One expansion unit for KX TD816 and up to two expansion units for KX TD1232 can be installed per system L 8 or 16 extensions l 8 extensions can can be added be added 4 CO Li
309. seceeseceeseceeeeeseeeecsaeees User Manual Display Contrast Adjustment KX T7230 and KX T7235 only Feature References None Operation References Not applicable Do Not Disturb DND Description Allows an extension user to appear busy to incoming CO or extension calls This can be set or cancelled by the extension user 3 56 Features 3 Features D Conditions e If your digital proprietary telephone DPT is not supplied with the FWD DND button it can be assigned on a flexible button e DND does not work for the following calls doorphone calls recalls for hold Timed Reminder alarm or calls directed by Intercept Routing e Setting DND cancels any Call Forwarding feature currently set e A DPT user in DND mode can answer a call by pressing the button showing the arrival of the call e An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their Class of Service Do Not Disturb Override Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Call forwarding do not disturb set cancel Station Programming ccecceecceseeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment FWD DND Button Section 3 Features Do Not Disturb DND Override DPT Features SLT Features Do Not Disturb DND Do Not Disturb DND Override Descri
310. sers cannot make outgoing outside calls Any 3 digit numeric code can be used to lock the station The same code is used to unlock it Conditions e Making intercom calls and receiving intercom or outside calls are permitted on the locked station e Remote Station Lock Control overrides Electronic Station Lockout If the operator sets Remote Station Lock on a station that has already been locked by the station user the user cannot unlock it e It is programmable to admit the press of the Register Recall button during an outside call on the locked station e Emergency dial numbers programmed in 311 Emergency Dial Set can be dialed on a locked station Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 61 E 3 Features Programming References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Electronic station lockout set cancel 990 System Additional Information Field 15 Feature References Section 3 Features Remote Station Lock Control Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Electronic Station Lockout End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through Description DTMF signaling is required for access to special network services offered by some telephone companies This system allows the proprietary telephone user to send DTMF signals to the line during an established call Conditions e If the dial type of the line is assigned to DTMF Tone Through mode is established automatically after the dialing
311. sion While in conversation a call waiting tone informs the user of another incoming call that is waiting He or she can answer the second call by disconnecting or placing the current call on hold Call waiting tone can be enabled or disabled by dialing the appropriate feature number e The call waiting tone is generated when an outside call or a doorphone call comes in or when an extension caller executes Busy Station Signaling e Setting Data Line Security temporarily cancels Call Waiting which has been turned on by an extension user e For proprietary telephone users two types of call waiting tone are provided to prevent them from missing the tone as shown below A digital proprietary telephone user can select the desired type by station programming Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Call waiting set cancel Station Programming 0ccecceeceseeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeees User Manual Call Waiting Tone Type Assignment Section 3 Features Busy Station Signaling BSS DPT Features SLT Features Call Waiting Features 3 37 C 3 Features Charge Fee Reference Description Allows pre assigned display telephone users to see charges and print out the charges Charges are displayed per extension CO line Account Code or the total of each can be referred to There are two display formats Pulse or AS Cond
312. ss NEXT Display example CO01 Regular 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions To assign all CO lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 Feature References Section 3 Features Reverse Circuit System Programming 4 101 430 4 6 CO Line Programming DID Table Number Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns DID table number to each CO line group e CO line group TRG number 1 through 8 all CO line groups e DID table number 1 through 4 All CO line groups Not stored 1 Enter 430 Display DID Table NO 2 Press NEXT Display TRK GRP NO gt 3 Enter a CO line group number To enter CO line group number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example TRG1 Not Stored 4 Enter a DID table number To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line group press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line group number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END This is the first and the basic programming for the DID feature If the assignment is changed here it affects the other programmings 43
313. ssignment User Programming Mode Some programming items are allowed to any display DPT user in the system See Section 4 1 4 User Programming Mode 4 2 System Programming 4 1 1 Using the Digital Proprietary Telephone Soft Buttons and SHIFT Button on the Display DPT Three soft buttons are provided just below the display on the display Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT The functions of these soft buttons vary as the programming procedures advance from step to step Those functions that are currently assigned to the buttons are shown on the lower line of the display See Viewing the Display on page 4 6 for more information on the display lines If the SHIFT button indicator is on two functions are available with each soft button To alternate between the two functions press the SHIFT button on the right side of the display Soft button variations Type 1 Example KX T7230 Display CLR NEXT Buttons Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Type 2 Press SHIFT SKP CLR NEXT to alternate gt SKP PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT Type 3 Press SHIFT gt SEL NEXT _altemate oo lt SEL PREV Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT Soft 1 Soft 2 Soft 3 SHIFT System Programming 4 3 4 1 1 Using the Digital Proprietary Telephone Type 4 Press SHIFT
314. sssessesessseessressersserssseeessees 245 4 CO Line Unit Connection sicssseoscciccatiscaesietnchiasc agus caase 2 4 6 4 DID Line Unit Connection sssessssssesssesesssesssresseessesseee 2 4 7 2 ISDN SO Line Unit Connection 00 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenteeees 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 2 4 9 Doorphone and Door Opener Connection eeeeeeeeeeereee Available for KX TD1232 only Contents Po 2 4 10 System Connection sessersssssssssssesessssisseseisessssessesssseresoeseresss 2 49 2 2 4 11 Backup Battery and Adaptor Card Connection eee 2 51 2 4 12 Battery Adapter Connie Ctr vcsiicd cotte dor ceticassasid acta Gededienndesetes 2 52 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection sccsccssssssssssssssscscsssssesees 2 54 2 6 Starting the System for the First Time cssccssssccssssccsssceeees 2 56 2 7 System RESALE 5 ssssccesecscsvadssacctessvccssessoesivesscedneeseveetcnsneceunsssvesensonaeneess 2 58 2 8 System Data Clear sesssecssoescoosscosesossssesosocsocossoosssoessssssssescoosssossssses 2 59 Section 3 Features A Absent Message Capability ccccccceceseceeeceeeeeeseeceaeceeeeseneeeaeeeaeees 3 2 Account Code BING isteacertsacciniranicacuninie aden iu eareeanneernc 3 2 Alternate Calling Ring Voice sxccseiiessascsccsasceslertgateadasersedeuedeaniseaesies 3 4 Pas Werte Direct CO Line cated ccsed asaated antl een e
315. swer Button VM Hunting i Chain y VMX j amp VM 3 1 4 Changing from VM to Automated Attendant AA The Automated Attendant Service is automatically activated in the following cases 1 The incoming call is not answered by the operator and IRNA is activated 2 The operator is assigned as a destination of DIL 1 1 and the operator sets the Call Forwarding to VPS Outside Call DIL 1 1 DIL 1 N System C FWD IRNA VM AA 1 f gt VM AA2 VM AA X a VM AA 3 3 128 Features 3 Features V 1 5 Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS can turn on the MESSAGE button indicator of the corresponding telephone as a notification to the user of the telephone The VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his her mailbox When the MESSAGE button indicator is lit pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the stored message 2 Automated Attendant AA Service 2 1 AA to Extension AA receives and answers an outside call and offers services such as transferring to a specified extension or the corresponding mailbox by the DTMF signalling which is sent from the calling party Outside Call Transfer Extension _ AA1 pf gt AA2 A AA Hunting i Chain A
316. t aa e E AES 3 15 Directed Call Pickup Call Pickup Directed 0 eee eeeeeeeeeteeees 3 33 Display Call Information lt 2 4 0dsbi die bua e 3 53 Display Extension Programmed Data cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeees 3 54 Display Self Extension Number 0 g2 0s02e c sds desseeeeeGnedions 3 55 Display Time and Date s2ishcued died ealis ne ae 3 56 Display Contrast Adjustment cece eeeeeeeseecseeceeeeeeeeesneeesaeeneessees 3 56 Do Not Disturb DND c cccccccccesssssseceseceeeseessnsecececeeeesessnssaeeeeees 3 56 Do Not Disturb DND Override ists cat cacsetahenesodagendial ansndacscanaienad 3 57 Door QUICHE ocd sesucesea es Oae 3 58 Contents Doorphone Callisa tstssccasceceethest on ctatensusetnalusseantateteeiet enctaanaueracueccantecee 3 58 DSS Console KX T7240 ssessesssseesssseessssersssseresssesesssoseesssseesssseeees 3 59 Electronic Station Lockout ssessseeesesessseesseesseesseeesseessseessersseessees 3 61 End to End DTMF Signaling Tone Through seeseeeeeseessesseeeseee 3 62 Exclusive Hold Call Hold Exclusive CO Line Intercom 3 28 29 Extension Group eieaa aie ea oe BA att Shades 3 62 External Feature ACCESS iiini agai bi latent a cones 3 63 EXtra Device Port QEDP ss mn ann a a a a sees codes 3 64 Flexible Button Button Flexible 0 0 ccc cecceeeseeseesseeeeeeeeesreees 3 16 Flexible NUT METIM Gs 2 a cacucehoad uc chats saieusaiug nan a
317. tem Programming 4 8 Extension Programming 602 Extension Group Assignment Description Assigns each extension to an extension group Extension groups are used for Group Call Pickup Station Hunting and Paging Group This program is also used to assign all Voice Mail ports Automated Attendant ports of your Voice Processing System if available to an extension group Selection e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 1 2 KX TD1232 01 through 64 1 2 all jacks 1 first part 2 second part e Extension group number 01 through 16 Default All jacks 1 2 Extension group 1 Programming 1 Enter 602 Display EXT Group Asn 2 Press NEXT Display Jack NO gt 3 Enter a jack number To enter jack number 01 you can also press NEXT To select the second part 2 press NEXT after entering a jack number Display example 01 1 EXG1 4 Enter the extension group number To change the current entry enter the new extension group number Press STORE To program another jack press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired jack number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 Press END Conditions e There is a maximum of 16 extension groups Each extension can only belong to one group e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e For an explanation of jack numbering see Rotation of jack number o
318. ter a DID table number To enter DID table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 16 4 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 5 Press STORE 6 To program another DID table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e You cannot leave the entry empty e To assign all DID tables to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID table number 1 Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID System Programming 4 107 436 4 6 CO Line Programming Pay Tone Assignment Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Enables Pay Tone of the Central Office Your Central Office sends the pay tone or the ISDN SO line sends pay message so that the counting for fee starts for the call e CO line number 01 through 24 all CO lines e Enable Disable All CO lines Disable 1 Enter 436 Display Pay Tone Asn 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e An optio
319. the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COS 1 e Program 601 Class of Service is used to assign a Class of Service to each extension Feature References Section 3 Features Night Service Toll Restriction 4 108 System Programming 4 7 COS Programming 502 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Limit Description This program allows you to restrict the duration of outside calls on a Class of Service COS basis Selection e COS number 1 through 8 all COS e Disable no limit Enable limit Default All COS Disable Programming 1 Enter 502 Display CO Durat Limit 2 Press NEXT Display COS NO gt 3 Enter a COS number To enter COS number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example COS1 Disable 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another COS press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired COS number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e An outside call originated or answered by the programmed extension user is disconnected when the time specified in program 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time expires Extensions in the limited classes cannot establish a CO to CO call that is cannot transfer forward an outside call to another CO line To assign all COS to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents program
320. the connection of digital proprietary telephones DSS Console and single line devices such as single line telephones facsimiles and data terminals System Connection With the addition of optional System Inter Connection Card two Digital Super Hybrid Systems can be connected together to expand the system capacity The two systems function as one however some functions such as paging and music on hold are duplicated Digital Proprietary Telephones DPT The system supports four different models of digital proprietary telephones which cover the range from a monitor set to a large display handsfree version 1 2 System Outline Available for KX TD1232 only 1 1 System Highlights Programming System The system can be programmed from a digital proprietary telephone or from a personal computer Voice Mail Integration The system supports Voice Processing Systems with in band DTMF signaling Automatic Route Selection ARS Automatically selects the pre programmed least expensive route for outgoing toll calls Trunk CO Line Answer From Any Station TAFAS Ringing occurs over the external paging system call can be answered from any station Remote Station Lock Control Allows an operator to lock an extension so that outgoing calls cannot be made Charge Fee Reference Allows the user to see charges and print out the charges Budget Management Limits the telephone usage to a pre assigned amount Hotel Application Allow
321. the digital proprietary telephones in the group will receive the page If a member of the paged group answers your paging you can talk to the person through the connected line e To select all groups pages all extensions e Confirmation tone is sent when the page is made or answered Eliminating the tone is programmable Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering Paging group Paging group answer 990 System Additional Information Field 16 Section 3 Features Extension Group DPT Features SLT Features Paging Group Paging ANSWER Paging and Transfer Paralleled Telephone Description Conditions Any digital proprietary telephone can be connected in parallel with a single line telephone The following combination of telephones is available DPT SLT a digital proprietary telephone and a single line telephone device When a parallel connection is made an extension user can make and answer a call using either telephone e The digital proprietary telephone DPT can be used to perform normal operations whether or not the SLT is enabled e In the SLT DPT combination if one telephone goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the former e When receiving a call The SLT is enabled Both the DPT and the SLT ring except when the DPT is in Handsfree Answerback mode or Voice
322. the jack number for a manager and or operators The manager extension can perform system programming The operator has the ability to perform operator services e OPE 1 operator 1 OPE 2 operator 2 MNGER manager e Jack number KX TD816 01 through 16 KX TD1232 01 through 64 Operator 1 Jack 01 Operator 2 and Manager Not stored 1 Enter 006 Display Operator Manager 2 Press NEXT to program operator 1 Display OPE 1 Jack0l To program another item you can also keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired one is displayed 3 Enter a jack number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new jack number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another item press NEXT or PREV 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END e Up to two operators and a manager can be programmed e In the case of KX TD1232 jack numbers 01 through 32 are for the Master System and 33 through 64 are for the Slave if available e The manager cannot be assigned the jack number of the DSS Console Port set in program 007 DSS Console Port and Paired Telephone Assignment e If the assigned jack is in eXtra Device Port mode the digital proprietary telephone jack is treated as the manager operator extension e If there is no operator or manager press CLEAR at step 3 Section 3 Features Manager Extension Operator 4 26 System Programming 4 2 Manager Programming 0
323. the last dialed or saved number is done up to the specified number of times Selection Number of times 1 through 30 Default 4 times Programming 1 Enter 209 Display Redial Times 2 Press NEXT Display example Attempt 4 3 Enter the number of times To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number of times 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Conditions e Program 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time is used to set the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts e You cannot leave the entry empty Feature References Section 3 Features Redial Automatic System Programming 4 65 210 4 4 Timer Programming Automatic Redial Interval Time Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Sets the interval time between Automatic Redial attempts Time seconds 3 through 120 X10 is the actual time 12 120 s 1 Enter 210 Display Interval Time 2 Press NEXT Display example Time 120 sec 3 Enter the time To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new time 4 Press STORE 5 Press END e You enter a number from 3 through 120 The actual time is 10 times your input e Program 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times is used to set the number of times Automatic Redial is tried e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Redial Automatic 4 66 System Programming 4 4 Timer Programming 211 Dial Start
324. ther floating station keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired floating station is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 Press END e A floating number is composed of two through four numerical digits 0 through 9 e The leading one or two digits of the floating numbers are subject to program 100 Flexible Numbering 01 through 16 Ist through 16th hundred extension blocks e Floating numbers and extension numbers should be unique Double entry and incompatible entry for these numbers are invalid Valid entry example 10 and 11 10 and 110 Invalid entry example 10 and 106 210 and 21 e You cannot leave the entry empty Section 3 Features Floating Station 4 134 System Programming Available for KX TD1232 only 4 10 Resource Programming 814 Modem Standard Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References Assigns the modem standard There are two standards available BELL and CCITT BELL CCITT CCITT 1 Enter 814 Display MOD 2 Press NEXT EM Standard Display example MODEM CCITT 3 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 4 Press STORE 5 Press END Select the standard used by your modem Section 3 Features System Programming and Diagnosis with Personal Computer Available for KX TD1232 only System Programming 4 135 815 4 10 Resource Programming System Working Report Printout
325. ting set cancel 731 47 __ Pickup dialing program set cancel 74 48 Absent message set cancel 750 49 _ Timed reminder set cancel confirm 76 50 ___ Electronic station lockout set cancel 77 51 Night service mode set cancel 78 52__ Parallel telephone mode set cancel 69 53___ Background music external on off 65 54 CO incoming call information log mode 56 55 CO incoming call information log lock 57 56 Timed reminder remote 7x System Programming 4 35 101 4 3 System Programming Day Night Service Switching Mode Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References This program is used to determine if night mode is automatic or manual Manual Auto automatic Manual 1 4 5 Enter 101 Display Day Night Mode Press NEXT Display example D N Mode Manual Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed Press STORE Press END e If automatic switching is assigned day night mode is switched at the time programmed in 102 Day Night Service Starting Time e The operator can switch the day night mode at any time Section 3 Features Night Service 4 36 System Programming 4 3 System Programming 102 Day Night Service Starting Time Description Sets the starting time on a day of the week basis when automatic day night switching is programmed in program 101 Day Night Service Switching M
326. tion 2 4 8 Installing Expansion Unit KX TD170 KX TD180 D KX TD185 KX TD280 The following procedures can be used to install either 8 Station Line Unit KX TD170 4 CO Line Unit KX TD180 KX TD180D 4 DID Line Unit KX TD185 or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit KX TD280 System programming is required for unit location identification Default KX TD816 bottom 4 CO Line Unit top 8 Station Line Unit KX TD1232 bottom 4 CO Line Unit middle and top 8 Station Line Unit Note The KX TD1232 is illustrated as a main unit 1 Loosen the two the screws on the cover 3 Hook the cabinet to the main unit and plate Insert fingers into the slits to slide the cabinet to the left until it is remove the cover plate fixed SS D Ta gt I P Slit sit Ka SS La Note Any of the cover plates can be removed as needed 2 Connect the cabinet cord to the 4 Loosen the outside screw and slide the connector in the main unit firmly cover to the right D1232 g Panasonic Outside screw Installation 2 39
327. tion PROBLEM PROBABLE CAUSE POSSIBLE SOLUTION Extension does not operate Bad printed circuit board Exchange printed circuit board for Extension Card another printed circuit board Bad connection between the system and extension A telephone with an A A1 relay is connected Bad extension Take that extension and plug it into the same extension port using a short telephone cord If the telephone does not work connection between the system and the extension must be repaired Use a 2 wires cord Set the A A1 relay switch of the telephone to OUT or OFF position Take that extension and plug it into another extension port that is working If the telephone does not work replace the phone Improper reset operation Press the Reset Button Noise in external paging Induced noise on the wire between the system and the amplifier Use a shielded cable as the connection wire between the system and amplifier A short shielded cable is recommended Volume distortion from external music source Excessive input level from external music source Decrease the output level of the external music source by using the volume control on the music source Speed Dialing or One Touch Dialing does not function Bad programming Enter the CO line access number 9 81 through 88 into program ming 6 2 Troubleshooting 6 1 6 1 2 Connection Troubleshooting Conne
328. tion 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 4 126 System Programming 4 10 Resource Programming 801 Description Selection Default Programming Conditions Feature References SMDR Format Used to match the SMDR output to the paper size being used in the printer Page length determines the number of lines per page Skip perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page e Page length lines 4 through 99 e Skip perforation lines 0 through 95 Page length 66 Skip perforation 0 1 Enter 801 Display SMDR Format 2 Press NEXT to program page length Display example Page Length 66 3 Enter the page length To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new page length 4 Press STORE 5 Press NEXT to program skip perforation Display example Skip Perf 0 6 Enter the skip perforation To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new skip perforation 7 Press STORE 8 Press END e The page length should be four lines or more longer than the skip perforation length e A title is positioned on the first three lines on every page e The programmed format becomes valid only if the EIA RS 232C cable is connected If a printer is already connected disconnect it and connect again Otherwise the former format becomes valid Section 3 Features Station Message Detail Recording SMDR System Programming 4 127 802 Descr
329. to specific extension jacks or Power Failure Transfer jacks are connected directly to CO lines as follows KX TD816 CO 1 Extension jack 1 CO 2 Extension jack 2 CO 5 Power Failure Transfer jack KX TD1232 CO 1 CO 2 CO 9 Power Failure Transfer jacks of Master System CO 13 CO 14 CO 21 Power Failure Transfer jacks of Slave System The Power Failure Transfer jack is on the 8 CO Line Card 4 CO Line Unit and the 4 DID Line Unit KX TD181 Power Failure Transfer Jac KX TD180 N View of Connentor xl e O o lt a lo View of Connentor To a single line telephone To a single line telephone 2 54 Installation 2 5 Power Failure Transfer Connection KX TD185 View of TEL Jack CO T2 R1 T1 R2 N A R Ring T Tip To a single line telephone Notes In the event of a power failure system memory is protected by the factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except for the saved values of the Camp on Saved Number Redial Last Number Redial Call Park and Message Waiting features e The system automatically changes the current connection when the power supply stops e If DC power is available from backup batteries in the event of an AC power failure the system does not change the current connection Program
330. to the CO line Call blocking If your central office can receive both DTMF and pulse signals but you are contracted for pulse select this mode When dialing on the line with an MF4 telephone only the pulse signals are sent to the CO line Selection e CO line number KX TD816 01 through 08 x all CO lines KX TD1232 01 through 24 x all CO lines e DTMF Pulse C Block call blocking Default All CO lines DTMF Programming 1 Enter 402 Display CO Dial Mode 2 Press NEXT Display CO Line NO gt 3 Enter a CO line number To enter CO line number 01 you can also press NEXT Display example CO01 DIMF 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another CO line press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired CO line number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END Conditions e In the case of KX TD1232 COO1 through CO12 are for the Master System and CO13 through CO24 are for the Slave if available e To assign all lines to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for COO1 If DTMF is assigned set the DTMF time of the line in program 404 DTMF Time e If pulse or call blocking is assigned set the pulse speed of the line in program 403 Pulse Speed Selection and set the pulse break ratio and inter digit pause in program 990 System Additional Information Field 17 and
331. tons See Combination Table 1 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 e The Function Line shows M N O 2 Press the Soft 1 M button Press SHIFT to display the lower case of the above letters Using the SELECT button See Combination Table 2 1 Press 6 M belongs to 6 2 Press the SELECT button once e Pressing the SELECT button an appropriate number of times gives you the desired letter Pressing SELECT twice gives the letter m pressing three times gives N and so on to enter Mike Using method 1 See Combination Table 1 The display shows 1 Enter 6 6 M N O 2 Press Soft 1 M M M N O 3 Enter 4 4 G H I 4 Press SHIFT 4 g h i 5 Press Soft 3 i i g h i 6 Enter 5 MiS j k J 7 Press Soft 2 k Mik j k 8 Enter3 TE d e f 4 10 System Programming 4 1 3 Entering Characters 9 Press Soft 2 e Using method 2 See Combination Table 2 Mike The display shows Enter 6 Press SELECT Enter 4 Press SELECT six times Enter 5 Press SELECT four times Enter 3 Press SELECT four times SPADAKNRWNe Notes To erase all the letters press CLEAR To erase the last letter press lt M4 Mi5 Mik Mik3 Mike System Programming 4 11 4 1 4 User Programming Mode Some programming items are permitted to any display digital proprietary t
332. tor call 121 Hotel Application 990 System Additional Information Field 11 Feature References None Operation References Operator Service Features User Manual Operator Call Description Allows the extension user to call an extension operator by dialing the feature number if at least one operator is assigned There can be one or two extensions assigned as Operator and 2 Conditions None Programming References Section 4 System Programming 006 Operator Manager Extension Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Operator call Feature References None Operation References DPT Features SLT Features User Manual Operator Call 3 90 Features 3 Features P PAGING FEATURES SUMMARY Description Paging All Description Conditions Connection References Paging allows you to make a voice announcement to multiple persons at the same time Your message is announced over the built in speakers of digital proprietary telephones and or external speakers external pagers The paged person can answer your page from a nearby telephone Making and answering a page is possible from either a proprietary or single line telephone You can do paging with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging and Transfer Paging features are classified as follows Paging All Paging External Paging Group Allows you to make a voice announcement from the speakers of the digital proprietary telephones
333. triction Override mode the user can enter a pre assigned account code only when the user needs to override toll restriction In Option mode the user can enter any account code if needed e An account code can be stored into Memory Dialing System Station Speed Dialing One Touch Dialing Pickup Dialing Call Forwarding to CO Line e The Account button may be used in place of the feature number A flexible button on the proprietary telephone set can be programmed as the Account button e Account code entry after CPC detection must be done within 15 seconds Otherwise SMDR call record is activated and entry becomes impossible afterwards e If disconnection signal is selected in program 990 field 3 and Recall function is enabled in field 15 the Verified All Calls extension is allowed to make an outside call using the same line with Recall function e If an account code is appended to a call specified display telephone users can see the charge for the call Charge Fee Reference e In any mode emergency dial numbers stored in program 311 Emergency Dial Set can be dialed out without an account code entry Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 100 Flexible Numbering Account code entry 508 Account Code Entry Mode 990 System Additional Information Fields 3 15 Station Programming ccceccceecceseeereeeneeeeenteeeeeees Use
334. ts used for TAFAS feature For KX TD816 one FN is available For KX TD1232 four FNs are available These FNs can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b Intercept Routing destination 2 Modem used for system administration One FN is available This can be assigned as a DIL 1 1 destination b An extension number to call the modem 3 Digital Test Access used for testing One DTA is available The FN can be used as an extension Floating numbers cannot be used for setting a feature such as Call Forwarding etc Programming References Feature References Section 4 System Programming 100 Flexible Numbering 1st through 16th hundred extension blocks 813 Floating Number Assignment None Operation References Not applicable Full One Touch Dialing Description Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to make a call or have access to a system service with one button There is no need to turn the SP PHONE MONITOR button on before pressing the button which is required for One Touch Dialing Handsfree operation is automatically provided by pressing the One Touch Dialing DSS REDIAL or SAVE button Available for KX TD1232 only Features 3 67 H Conditions 3 Features e It is necessary to program automatic handsfree dial mode e This feature is also available with DSS buttons on a DSS Console e This feature is also available with the large display operation of KX T7235 Special Display Featur
335. tting can be changed to delayed ringing no ringing or no incoming call disable on a CO line number basis 3 100 Features 3 Features R Conditions e This feature does not apply to DIL 1 1 calls e If delayed no ringing or no incoming call disable is assigned to an extension the extension can answer an incoming call during no ring or the delay time by pressing the flashing button Programming References Section 4 System Programming 603 604 DIL 1 N Extension and Delayed Ringing Day Night Feature References Section 3 Features Direct In Lines DIL Operation References Not applicable Ringing Discriminating Description Allows the extension user to identify the incoming call by the ringing pattern See Section 5 1 Tone Ring Tone Conditions e When there are multiple incoming calls and the extension goes from off hook to on hook the calls are rung according to the following priority lt 1 gt Consultation Hold Recall lt 2 gt An incoming call from a line in which the Prime Line Preference Incoming function has been set with a proprietary telephone only lt 3 gt Call Waiting lt 4 gt Incoming calls Hold Recall Transfer Recall Unattended Conference Recall e If multiple incoming calls arrive at an on hook extension simultaneously priority as to which calls should be rung is generally on a first come first served basis In the case of digital proprietary telephones DPT howeve
336. ture References Assigns DID outgoing method immediate or wink to each DID table in accordance with the service of your central office Immediate Outgoing DID number can be transmitted right after seizing the CO line Wink Outgoing DID number can be transmitted after receiving the wink signal from the central office after seizing the CO line e DID table number 1 through 4 all DID tables e Immediate Wink All DID tables Wink 1 Enter 432 Display DID Out Asn 2 Press NEXT Display DID Table NO gt 3 Enter a DID table number To enter DID table number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Wink 4 Keep pressing SELECT until the desired selection is displayed 5 Press STORE 6 To program another DID table press NEXT or PREV or SELECT and the desired DID table number 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 8 Press END e The time the system waits for the confirmation wink signal can be programmed in program 435 DID Wink Time Out Assignment The system disconnects the CO line when the time out time expires e To assign all DID tables to one selection press the key at step 3 In this case the display shows the contents programmed for DID table number 1 Section 3 Features Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 104 System Programming 4 6 CO Line Programming 433 DID Subscriber Number Removed Digit and Received Digit Description Selection Default Programming Conditio
337. tus DTMF Set cusses oar aneainaceteats 4 45 114 VM Command DTMF Set cc cccsscecsssceesseceessseesseeesseees 4 47 TIS Adjust THe iiinis neersien 4 49 116 ROM Version Display lt c2s 4scssessvaedsslsacacesaeciueccateseetieeianss ss 4 50 117 Charge Display Selection 5 252 1cca cna dee 4 51 118 Charge Verification Assignment ceecceceseeecsseeeeeteeeennees 4 52 119 Charge Verification ID Code Set eeeeeeeeeesseeeesteeeennees 4 53 120 User Pass Word eranan aa nett iether 4 54 121 Hotel Application ssnin is 4 55 Timer Programming seoessseccsssesecesssccesssoossssooccssosecesososesssoossssooese 4 56 200 Hold Recall Time ccccccccceesssscececcceeeesenssaeeececeeeeeensaaees 4 56 201 Transfer Recall Time c ccccccceessssessssessssssssssssssssserseeees 4 57 202 Call Forwarding No Answer Time eccceeecceesseeeeteeeeees 4 58 203 Wie ree oC MIME 5 55 eS eee ea a taceee susaencoaseandeoks 4 59 204 Pickup Dial Waiting Time cece eeeeeeereeceseeecseeeeceteeeesees 4 60 205 Extension to CO Line Call Duration Time 0 eee 4 61 206 CO to CO Call Duration Time cccccessccececeeeeeesenseseees 4 62 207 Perse Digit TIME srusen an anisi 4 63 208 Intet Dicit TIME a i a E E 4 64 209 Automatic Redial Repeat Times ssssssesssesesseesssesssesseessee 4 65 210 Automatic Redial Interval Time cece ccccccceeeeesenseeeees 4 66 RIH Dia
338. ugh 6 8 Press END e There is a maximum of 20 toll call numbers which can be restricted for each program Each number has a maximum of seven digits consisting of 0 through 9 and The character can be used as a wild card character e Programs 306 310 TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 are used to assign exceptions to these numbers Programs 500 501 Toll Restriction Level Day Night are used to set the toll restriction value for each COS Section 3 Features Toll Restriction System Programming 4 7 306 310 4 5 TRS ARS Programming TRS Excepted Code Entry for Levels 2 through 6 These allow you to assign numbers which are exceptions to the toll restriction specified in programs 301 through 305 as follows Program 306 applies to level 2 Program 307 applies to levels 2 through 3 Program 308 applies to levels 2 through 4 Program 309 applies to levels 2 through 5 Program 310 applies to levels 2 through 6 e Location number 1 through 5 e Exceptional number 7 digits max All locations Not stored Description Selection Default Programming 1 A 3 4 5 6 7 8 Conditions Feature References Enter a program address 306 through 310 Display example TRS Excp LVL 2 Press NEXT Display Location NO gt Enter a location number To enter location number 1 you can also press NEXT Display example 1 Not Stored E
339. up CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing DPT Features SLT Features Outward Dialing Line Access CO Line Group 3 78 Features 3 Features L Line Access Direct Description Conditions Allows the digital proprietary telephone user to select a CO line by pressing an idle CO button which automatically establishes handsfree operation mode and allows the user to perform On Hook Dialing The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button nor lift the handset e There are three types of CO buttons which can be programmed on an extension Single CO button Group CO button and Loop CO button e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Tim 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 cccccccsceececeeeceteceeeeeeeeeaees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Group CO G CO Button Loop CO L CO Button Single CO S CO Button Section 3 Features Button Group CO G CO CO Line Connection Assignment Button Loop CO L CO Outgoing Button Single CO S CO DPT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Automatic Line Access CO Line Group Line Access Individual Line Access Indi
340. use the overlay e Before starting to program enter the programming mode See Entering the programming mode on page 4 6 Enter the program address The display shows the program title If your telephone has soft buttons the lower line shows the functions that are currently assigned to them 10 Press either Soft 3 NEXT shown on the display or the NEXT shown on the overlay 11 The message line advises you to enter a speed dial number 12 If the telephone number has already been stored the number is displayed 13 Enter the telephone number that you want to store Your entry is displayed as you enter the digits 14 Pressing CLEAR erases the whole entry 15 Your entry is now stored The indicator lights red and confirmation tone lets you know that the storage is completed 16 Select the best way for you to store another speed dial number Pressing the NEXT PREV allows you to select the next higher lower speed dial number You can also keep pressing them until the desired one is displayed If you press SELECT System Programming 4 13 4 1 5 Example of Programming Sample of Description Explanation and the desired speed dial number the selected code is displayed 001 4 2 Manager Programming System Speed Dialing Number Set contd 17 You can continue to program another entry 18 After you have stored all your entries finish this program by pressing END
341. vidual Description Conditions Allows the digital proprietary telephone user one button access to a CO line without having to dial a line access code e Each extension is subject to system programming items for CO lines available to access e This feature requires a Single CO S CO button assignment on a proprietary telephone e The system waits for a programmed time before dialing after a CO line is seized Features 3 79 L 3 Features Programming References Feature References Operation References User Manual Section 4 System Programming 005 Flexible CO Button Assignment 211 Dial Start Time 400 CO Line Connection Assignment 605 606 Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment Day Night Station Programming 0 00ccccceecseeeeceteceteceeeeeeeeesees User Manual Flexible Button Assignment Single CO S CO Button Section 3 Features Button Single CO S CO CO Line Connection Assignment Outgoing DPT Features Outward Dialing Line Access Individual Line Preference Incoming No Line Prime Line Ringing Line Description Conditions A digital proprietary telephone user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences 1 No Line Preference No line is selected when you go off hook You must select a line to answer 2 Prime Line Preference You can assign a prime line beforehand and answer a call on that line when
342. wire A B KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 2 pair wire L H A and B are not necessary or KX T7250 2 pair wire A B L H KX T7240 2 pair wire L H A and B are not necessary SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Interface EIA RS 232C Output Equipment Printer Detail Recording Date Time Extension Number CO Line Number Dialled Number Call Duration Account Code 1 5 2 Characteristics Station Loop Limit KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 40 ohms Single Line Telephone 2c h ccsu secdetined 600 ohms including set ID Ts 18 46 10311 serene omens Center a a 20 ohms Minimum Leakage Resistance 15 000 ohms Maximum Number of Station Instruments per Line 1 for KX T7220 KX T7230 KX T7235 KX T7250 or single line telephone 2 by Parallel or eXtra Device Port Connection of a proprietary telephone and a single line telephone Ring Voltage 70 Vrms at 25 Hz depending on the Ringing Load Primary Power 240 VAC 50 Hz Central Office Loop Limit 1 600 ohms max Environmental Requirements 0 40 C 32 104 F 10 90 1 10 System Outline 1 5 3 System Capacity 1 5 3 System Capacity Lines Cards Units Station Equipment KX TD1232 Max Quantity Item KX TD816 Single System Max Quantity System Connection System Inter Connection Card Service Unit 1 1 8 CO Line Card or 1 4 ISDN SO Line Card 4 CO Line Unit 1 1 2 4 DID Line Unit or 2 ISDN SO Line Unit CO Line 8 12 24 ISD
343. witched to VM port temporarily e Other programming required program addresses 106 602 System Programming 4 47 114 4 3 System Programming VM Command DTMF Set conta Selection e LV MSG GETMSG AA SVC VM SVC DTMF signal number 16 digits max Default LV MSG H GETMSG x H AA SVC 8 VM SVC 6 Programming 1 Enter 114 Display VM Command Set 2 Press NEXT to program the LV MSG command To program another command keep pressing NEXT until the desired command is displayed Display example LV MSG H 3 Enter a DTMF signal number To delete the current entry press CLEAR To change the current entry press CLEAR and the new number 4 Press STORE 5 To program another selection keep pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired selection is displayed 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 7 Press END Conditions e A command signal number can have a maximum of 16 digits consisting of 0 through 9 RECALL and PAUSE The RECALL button is available only for LV MSG and GETMSG commands to store H which means Home Position If H is stored for LV MSG a mailbox number programmed in program 609 Voice Mail Access Codes or an extension number will be sent to the VM port Follow On ID function If certain codes are required before and after the ID code insert H between the codes as aaaHbbb If nothing is stored it will operate as H If
344. y into the plug Port No 4 Port No 3 Port No 2 Port No 1 idila To Terminal Board or Modular Jacks from the Central Office 2 34 Installation 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Installation Diagram A lightning protector is a device to be installed on a CO line to prevent a dangerous surge from entering the building and damaging equipment A dangerous surge can occur if a telephone line comes in contact with a power line Troubles due to lightning surges have been showing a steady increase with the development of electronic equipment In many countries there are regulations requiring the installation of a lightning protector A lightning strike to a telephone cable which is 10 m above ground can be as high as 200 000 volts This system should be installed with lightning protectors In addition connection to earth ground is very important for the protection of the system CO CO CO Lightning Protectors Main Distribution Main Unit Frame EXTN EXTN EXTN Earth Terminal age acaba aT Frame SLT i PT i Earth Earth Installation 2 35 2 4 3 Lightning Protector Installation Outside Installation Diagram If you install an extension outside of the main building the following precautions

Panasonic TD816 Ver 2 Instruction Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents